JP7237659B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a special zone effect related to the pending display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-137126 A

The gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1 has a problem that interest may decrease after the special zone effect is finished .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a player.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. easily changeable,
It is possible to execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display will change depending on whether the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed;
The change suggesting effect can be executed when the specific display moves,
A notification image that allows recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
As a display mode after the change of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode with a high degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state from the first mode,
The change effect executing means can execute the change effect when the specific display moves when the specific effect is not being executed,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the highly expected special effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a step effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a step effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes in stages) starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect. 8-14 to 8-14, in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. Figure 8-16) and
with
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 of "Close!" or, as shown in FIG.
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the step effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode (for example, the collective success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect at a higher rate than when the parts collecting effect of failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. (See Figure 8-10)
moreover,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode and the expectation for the promotion effect to be executed in the second mode can be increased step by step, the interest in the game is improved. do. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change, so the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The step effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the step effect is a effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The step effect executing means can display a plurality of special effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed (for example, Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface mode from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. (See Fig. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second mode.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The step effect execution means displays a special effect image when the advantageous state is obtained, at a higher rate than when the advantageous state is not obtained, while a plurality of special effect images are being displayed step by step in the step effect. Change the mode (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modified example of FIG. 8-33 7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the special effect images while the number of display of the special effect images increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
After displaying the special effect image in a manner in which it is difficult to identify which of the first mode of the promotion effect and the second mode of the promotion effect is to be executed in the stage effect, the step effect execution means displays the Displaying in a manner in which it is possible to identify which of the promotion effect of the first mode and the promotion effect of the second mode is to be executed (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the parts image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner that allows the player to identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the step performance which of the first mode promotion performance and the second mode promotion performance will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the second mode promotion performance. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in the first mode when the special effect image does not change to the special display mode in the staged effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect) When the push button 31B is determined, the ratio of production patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 failing to gather is higher than production patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 succeeding in gathering. 8-, when the part assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 will be displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the promotion effect not being executed.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means 7 to 11. Conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine that executes a special zone effect related to a hold display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-137126. However, there is a possibility that the interest will decrease after the special zone production is finished.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

The gaming machine of means 7 is a gaming machine (eg, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (eg, pending display, active display) corresponding to the variable display,
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to means 7,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggesting effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 and 8,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 9, and has special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of step 57AKS011),
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 7 to 10,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine 1 used in the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) is a perspective view showing an operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button; (A) is a perspective view showing a ball-hitting operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball-hitting operation handle. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation control process processing of the characteristic part 063SG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing of the characteristic portion 063SG; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an operation object determination ratio in an operation prompting effect, (B) is a diagram showing an assembly effect pattern determination ratio, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the assembly effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the part set effect pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing the part set effect pattern determination ratio. (A) is a diagram showing how the display mode of the push buttons changes in the component assembly effect, and (B) is a diagram illustrating how the display mode of the stick controller changes in the component group effect. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing of the characteristic portion 063SG; FIG. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to the start of the super ready-to-win effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly effect. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern A or C. FIG. (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern B or D. FIG. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of an operation prompting effect. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the production in the jackpot game state. It is a figure explaining the flow of production from the start of the jackpot game state to the normal game state via the time saving state. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing right-hand shot notification. (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing right-hand shot notification. (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball flowing effect in the shooting operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing right hitting notification. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an assembly effect in the modified example 1 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing a super ready-to-win effect in modification 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the steering wheel assembly effect in the modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the route construction effect in the modification 4 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) is a diagram showing an operation mode of a movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing a structure of the movable body. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as Modified Example 5. FIG. (D) to (G) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting presentation as Modified Example 5. FIG. (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting presentation as a modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) to (E) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of a part assembly effect as a modification example 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of an operation prompting presentation as Modified Example 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of another execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an execution rate and an appearance rate of the notice Y of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an execution ratio and an appearance ratio of the advance notice Z of the characteristic portion 53AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 57AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific display processing of a characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display change pattern of a specific display of characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition ratios of zones; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the modification of characteristic part 57AK.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (more specifically, (to be described later)), game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big winning slot, the occurrence of a prize, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102, an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When backup data is stored in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal, the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal, the CPU 103 performs restoration processing (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 063SG)
Next, the characterizing portion 063SG of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the present embodiment, for example, "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "063SGS1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed explanation by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 8-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side. The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

(Game area)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 used in the characterizing portion 063SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a front view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the characteristic portion 063SG. 8-2, (A) is a perspective view showing the operation unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the operation unit. FIG. 8-3 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the push button. 8-4, (A) is a perspective view showing the ball-hitting operation handle, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the ball-hitting operation handle.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, in the game area Y of the pachinko gaming machine 1 used in the characterizing part 063SG of the present embodiment, the first route K1 of the flow-down routes through which game balls flow is A second route K2, which is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the image display device 5, and which is different from the first route K1 among the flow-down routes for the game balls, displays an image when viewed from the front. It is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the center decorative frame 5c surrounding the display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path K1 is called left hitting. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path K2 is called right hitting. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the left side of the game area Y, so it may be called a left-handed path. Further, the second path K2 is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by striking the game ball to the right side of the game area Y, so it may be called a right-handed path. It should be noted that the first route K1 and the second route K2 may be composed of separate routes, or may be routes that are partly shared. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area Y, the arrangement of obstacle nails, or the like.

In this embodiment, game balls flowing down the first path K1 are guided to enter the winning ball device 6A, while game balls flowing down the second path K2 pass through the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device. 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are guided so as to be able to enter. It should be noted that the game ball flowing down the second path K2 may enter the winning ball device 6A.

A movable body 32 is provided above the display area of the image display device 5 . The movable body 32 is provided so as to be vertically movable between an origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and an effect position positioned substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 ( 8-29(A)), the effect control CPU 120 can move the movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position at a predetermined timing during the variable display period or during the jackpot game state.

(Operation unit 600)
As shown in FIG. 8-2, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrated as an operation unit 600. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the stick controller 31A includes a base body 601 mainly made of metal, gripping members 602L and 602R covering the base body 601 from left and right sides, and front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R. It mainly has a lens cover 603 attached to the side, a rear base 604 arranged on the rear side of the base body 601, and a push button 31B attached to the upper part of the integrated grip members 602L and 602R.

The base body 601 is composed of a base portion 601A and a rotating portion 601C capable of rotating around a rotating shaft 601B directed in the horizontal direction with respect to the base portion 601A. The controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) is provided on the back base 604, and the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2) built in the push button 31B are connected to the effect control board 12. A wiring C, a connector CN, and the like are provided for this purpose.

The operation unit 600 is manufactured, for example, by: 1. 2. assembling the rear base 604 to the base body 601; 2. assembling the gripping members 602L and 602R to the rotating portion 601C; 4. Attaching the lens cover 603 to the front surfaces of the gripping members 602L and 602R; It is constructed by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the push button 31B to the upper part of the gripping members 602L and 602R. Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base body 601 is referred to as part A1, the rear base 604 as part A2, the lens cover 603 as part A3, the push button 31B as part A4, and the gripping members 602L and 602R as part A5. sometimes. Further, among these parts A1 to A5, the part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts A1 to A4. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part that constitutes the stick controller 31</b>A that constitutes a part of the operation unit 600 .

Specifically, the part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R) is the A. B. being a member operated (held) by the player; C. It has a shape that makes it easy to remember that it is a grip part. D. being larger than the other parts A1 to A4 (occupying a larger area for the entire operation unit 600); It is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, conditions A, B, C, D, etc. here) of being a part that is arranged in a conspicuous position for the player. A characteristic part of the parts of 31A will be described as part A5 (gripping members 602L and 602R).

As shown in FIG. 8-2(A), the stick controller 31A configured in this manner can be operated by grasping the gripping portion composed of the gripping members 602L and 602R and the lens cover 603 and pulling it forward. The sensor unit 35A detects an operation (movement) by the player.

(Push button 31B)
As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B is assembled under the base member 651 and the base member 651, and is arranged under the base member 651 and the sensor substrate 652 provided with the push sensor 35B. It is mainly composed of a vibrated member 653 vibrated by a vibration motor (not shown), a holding member 654 that holds the vibrated member 653 , and a transparent cover member 655 that covers the upper side of the holding member 654 .

The push button 31B is, for example, 1. at the time of manufacture. 2. assembling the sensor substrate 652 to the base member 651; 3. Assembling the sensor substrate 652 to the base member 651; 4. Assembling the member to be vibrated 653 to the holding member 654; 5. assembling to the holding member 654 in which the member to be vibrated 653 is assembled to the base member 651; It is configured by assembling a cover member 655 to a base member 651 . Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the base member 651 is referred to as component C1, the sensor substrate 652 as component C2, the member to be vibrated 653 as component C3, the holding member 654 as component C4, and the cover member 655 as component C5. Sometimes. Further, among these parts C1 to C5, the part C5 (cover member 655) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts C1 to C4. The "characteristic part" is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part that constitutes the push button 31B.

Specifically, the part C5 (cover member 655) is an A.C. B. being a member operated (depressed) by the player; C. The shape is easy to remember as a button. D. being larger than the other parts C1 to C4 (the area occupied by the entire push button 31B is large); It is a part that satisfies at least one condition (for example, conditions A, B, C, D, etc. here) of being a part that is arranged in a conspicuous position for the player. A characteristic part among the parts of 31B will be described as part C5 (cover member 655).

As shown in FIG. 8-3, the push button 31B configured in this way detects the operation (movement) by the player by the push sensor 35B by pressing the operating portion configured by the cover member 655. It's like

(Ball operation handle 30)
As shown in FIG. 8-4, the ball hitting operation handle 30 is composed of a handle base 720 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 with screws (not shown) and various members attached to the front side of the handle base 720. . As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the handle base 720 is composed of a tubular portion 720a and a dish-shaped flange portion 720b extending from the front end portion of the tubular portion 720a. An insertion passage 721 through which a handle shaft 726 is inserted through a handle collar 727 from the front side is formed through the center of the cylindrical portion 720a in the front-rear direction. Fixing bosses 722 and 723 for fixing the handle cover 735 protrude from the upper and lower portions of the flange portion 720b. The front and rear positions of the handle shaft 726 with respect to the insertion passage 721 are determined by an E-ring 726a attached to the outer periphery.

On the front left side of the flange portion 720b, there is a single-shot switch lever 724 having an operation portion 724b that is operated when shooting game balls one by one. A single-shot switch 725 for detecting the single-shot switch lever 724 is attached near the single-shot switch lever 724 by a screw 725a.

An annular touch ring 728 is non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the flange portion 720b by screws 728a, and an annular touch attachment plate 729 is attached to the front surface of the touch ring 728 by screws 729a. are fixed to the handle base 720 . A handle ring 730 that is rotatably operated by the player is assembled to the front side of the touch mounting plate 729 so as to be relatively rotatable with respect to the touch mounting plate 729 . The touch ring 728, handle sensor (not shown) and single switch 725 are connected to the main board 11 via a payout control board (not shown) by wiring C, connector CN and the like.

The handle ring 730 is formed with a fitting hole 732 in the center into which the tip of the handle shaft 726 is fitted so as not to rotate relative to each other. 733a and an arc-shaped insertion groove 733b through which the fixing boss 723 is inserted are formed. It is located on the front side of plate 729 .

A handle cover 735 arranged on the front side of the handle ring 730 has decorations (for example, model-specific patterns, marks, characters, titles, manufacturer's logos, etc.) on the front, which are not shown. It is fixed to the fixing bosses 722 and 723 by a screw 731a inserted through the fixing boss 722 and a screw 731b inserted through the fixing boss 723 from the rear side of the flange portion 720b. Therefore, the handle ring 730 is rotatably attached to the touch mounting plate 729 within a rotation range of about 90 degrees around the handle shaft 726 facing in the front-rear direction. A handle spring 734 interposed between the handle cover 735 and the handle ring 730 always urges the handle ring 730 in the counterclockwise direction.

The ball-striking operation handle 30 is manufactured by, for example, 1. 2. Assemble the touch ring 728 to the handle base 720; 2. Assemble the touch mounting plate 729; 3. Assemble the handle ring 730 integrated with the handle shaft 726; It is configured by assembling in steps 1 to 4, such as assembling the handle cover 735 . Note that the assembly process is optional, and the assembly may be performed in processes other than those described above. Moreover, it actually has a step of assembling more members than the above.

In the following, for convenience of explanation, the handle base 720 and the touch ring 728 are part B1, the touch mounting plate 729 is part B2, the handle ring 730 is part B3, and the handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726 is part B4. It is sometimes called and explained. Further, among these parts B1 to B4, the part B4 (handle cover 735 integrated with the handle shaft 726) will be described as a more characteristic part than the other parts B1 to B4. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a part forming part of the ball-striking operation handle 30 .

Specifically, the part B4 (handle cover 735) is the A.I. B. being a member operated by a player; C. It has a shape that makes it easy to remember that it is an operation part. D. being larger than the other parts B1 to B4 (the area occupied by the entire ball-striking operation handle 30 is large); It is a part that satisfies at least one of the conditions (for example, conditions C and D here) of being a part that is placed in a conspicuous position for the player. Among them, a characteristic part will be described as part B4 (handle cover 735).

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), in the ball-striking operation handle 30 configured in this way, the handle shaft 726 is rotated by rotating the handle ring 730 to the right against the biasing force of the handle spring 734. By transmitting the amount of rotation to a shooting device (not shown), the game ball set at the shooting position is launched (shot) with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation.

In this characterizing portion 063SG, a big hit type determination table is stored in the ROM 101 . The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot game state as "big hit". is a table referenced by In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as probability variable jackpot B'.

As the jackpot types, after the end of the jackpot game state, high-precision control and time-saving control are executed and the transition to a high-probability base state is performed. In the "non-probability variable jackpot" is set in which only time-saving control is executed and transitions to a low-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that a predetermined number of special game games (for example, 100 times) are executed, or the predetermined number of special game games are executed. It ends by entering a jackpot game state before being played.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- The allocation of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "variable probability jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (for example, the value in the range of "71" to "100") is the number of rounds "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds While assigned to the jackpot type, when the special figure variably displayed is the second special figure, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variable jackpot B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in a special game using the second special figure, it is not decided to control the jackpot type as "probability variable jackpot B" and control to a normal open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control In a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls to be obtained is small, thereby preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. It's like

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value to the "non-variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure (for example, value in the range of “1” to “51”), so the probability of a non-probable hit and the probability of a hit are the first special special game or the second special. are considered to be the same regardless of

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for the "variable probability big hit B" is different depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure, the "variable probability big hit A ” also differs depending on whether it is the first special special game or the second special special game, and for the “probability variable jackpot A” with a large number of rounds, the second special special game The case is set to be easier to determine than the case of the first special figure special figure game. In other words, the second special game is more advantageous for the player than the first special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". may For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, a smaller determination value than in the case of the special game of the first special may be assigned to the "probability variable jackpot B" jackpot type. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

In this way, in this characteristic part 063SG, in the normal state (low base state) which is not the time saving state (high base state), even if the game ball flows down the second route K2 by hitting to the right, the game ball enters the second start winning opening Since it is difficult to enter, it is more advantageous for the player to win the game ball into the first start winning hole by hitting left, while in the time-saving state (high base state) or in the jackpot game state, the game ball is hit by right hitting. If the second route K2 flows down, the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, which is more advantageous for the player than making the game ball win the first starting winning hole by hitting left.

FIG. 8-5 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 063SG. In this characteristic portion 063SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "losing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), and is variable. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is "losing" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach-loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-5, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 063SG is executed is shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach variation patterns. is set. In addition, regarding the special figure variable display time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is performed in this characteristic part 063SG, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is performed The special figure variable display time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is set so that the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach In the reach variation pattern, the longer the variable display time, the higher the expectation of a "big hit".

In addition, in the present feature unit 063SG, as described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 8-6 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic part 063SG. In this characteristic portion 063SG, the variation pattern to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-6, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present characteristic portion 063SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the fluctuation special figure is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3, select the changing pattern determination table B for losing, and the losing Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "losing" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 4, the change pattern determination table C for losing is selected, and the losing Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

Further, when the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for loss, and use the variation pattern determination table D for loss to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic portion 063SG is "losing", the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the fact that it is in a time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach-losing variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate at which variable display is performed. It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

FIG. 8-7 is a flow chart showing the effect control process (step S76) shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the firing operation promotion effect process of 063SGS162 after the pre-reading notice setting process of 063SGS161, and then performs one of the processes of 063SGS170 to 063SGS175 according to the value of the effect process flag. I do. In addition, in this characteristic portion 063SG, the effect processing during the small hit of S174 and the end effect processing of the end of the small hit of S175 shown in FIG. Carry up. In addition, the contents of the firing operation promotion rendering process will be described later.

FIG. 8-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (063SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer (not shown) at the time of start winning ” are shifted upward by one buffer number (063SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 063SGS271 (063SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (063SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (063SGS273; Y), start Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the received command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning, 1 buffer number Shift up by minutes (063SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 063SGS272 or 063SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (063SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (063SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 063SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (Losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

After the processing of 063SGS276, in 063SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the SP reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern designation command. If the variation pattern is not the SP reach variation pattern, select the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command (063SGS278).

On the other hand, when it is determined in 063SGS277 that the variation pattern is the SP ready-to-win variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 performs operation promotion effect pattern determination processing for determining the operation promotion effect type (063SGS279). Here, the operation prompting effect will be described.

(Operation promotion effect)
In this characteristic part 063SG, when the super reach variation pattern PA2-2 or PB1-2 is determined in the variation pattern setting process of S111 shown in FIG. 5, the effect control CPU 120 executes the super reach effect during variable display. At the same time, at a predetermined timing during execution of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is validated, and during the operation valid period, the player can make an action that can be detected by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In other words, an operation prompt effect is executed to prompt the player to operate either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and if there is an operation, the result of the variable display is notified. there is

Below, the flow from the start of the variable display of the decoration pattern to the end of the super ready-to-win effect will be described. FIGS. 8-13 (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to the start of the super ready-to-win effect. FIGS. 8-14 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-15 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-16 (A) to (R) are diagrams for explaining an example of the flow of the part assembly presentation. FIGS. 8-17 are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on effect pattern A or C in (A) to (G). 8-18 (A) to (H) are diagrams for explaining an example of a controller assembly effect based on the effect pattern B or D. FIG. 8-19 (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of an operation prompting presentation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative design, and then, as shown in FIG. After setting the display mode to the predetermined ready-to-win state, as shown in FIG. 8-13(C), super ready-to-win effect is started with the development of super ready-to-win. In this characterizing portion 063SG, a battle presentation in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is executed as a super ready-to-win presentation. Incidentally, in this characterizing section 063SG, a battle effect is executed as a super ready-to-win effect, but an effect other than the battle effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts accepting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the battle effect, and validates the detection of the operation during this operation valid period. An operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the operation of the operation target (the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) that has been set. As shown in FIG. 8-19(A), the operation prompting effect is to display a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and a character image Z2 reading "Exit!" on the image display device 5, or B), the image display device 5 displays a push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and a character image Z4 reading "Push!". It is also possible to output sounds such as "Pull!" and "Push!"

Next, the timing at which the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, that is, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected. The result of the battle presentation is notified at the timing when the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B does not input the detection signal, or when the operation valid period has passed without input of the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. For example, when the variable display result is a big win, as shown in FIGS. If the display result is a loss, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and (F), if the player loses, the variable display result is reported as a loss.

That is, at the end of the super ready-to-win effect, the operation promotion effect is executed during the operation effective period during which the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective at the timing of notifying whether or not the variable display result will result in a big win. It is said to be a production that In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it may be notified that the variable display result is a big hit by executing a relief effect after announcing that the player has lost the battle performance.

(Controller assembly performance)
In addition, in the present characteristic portion 063SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A or the push controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A as shown in FIG. 8-19(A) or FIG. Before the push button image Z3 imitating the button 31B is displayed, that is, before the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, the controller assembly effect of assembling the stick controller 31A can be executed. When the assembly is successful (completed), the controller image Z1 prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed at a high rate. The button image Z3 is displayed at a high rate.

The stick controller 31A is composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described with reference to FIG. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order in the form of assembly, and as shown in FIG. It is said that

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-17(A) to 8-17(F), the effect pattern A displays a component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A1, and then displays a component image ZA1 corresponding to the component A5. The part image ZA5 is displayed in the form of assembling, the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 is displayed in the part image ZA1 in the form of assembling, and the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 is displayed in the part image ZA1 in the form of assembling. Then, by displaying the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 on the part image ZA1 in a manner of assembling, a completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed. In other words, it is a pattern in which assembly is successful (completed).

As shown in FIGS. 8-18(A) to 8-18(G), the effect pattern B is a mode in which a part image ZA1 corresponding to the part A1 is displayed, and then a part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 is attached to the part image ZA1. , the part image ZA3 corresponding to the part A3 is displayed in the form of assembling the part image ZA1, the part image ZA4 corresponding to the part A4 is displayed in the part image ZA1, and the part image ZA1 is displayed. By displaying the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 in the manner in which the part image ZA5 corresponding to the part A5 is assembled, the completed image ZA6 in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are finally used and the assembly is completed is displayed, that is, the assembly is successful. It is a pattern to (complete).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 (A) to (E) and (G), production pattern C has the same parts assembly order as production pattern A, but parts corresponding to part A4 are shown in part image ZA1. After the image ZA4 is displayed in the form of assembly, an unfinished image ZA7 is finally displayed in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed. That is, the assembly fails (is not completed). is.

As shown in FIGS. 8-18 (A) to (F) and (H), production pattern D has the same parts assembly order as production pattern B, but parts corresponding to part A5 are shown in part image ZA1. After the image ZA5 is displayed in the form of assembly, an unfinished image ZA7 is finally displayed in which all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are not used and the assembly is not completed. That is, the assembly fails (is not completed). is.

Also, the assembly order of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in these production patterns A to D is shown in FIG. Since the assembly order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described, the production effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZA1-ZA5 in the effect patterns A-D may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) constituting the stick controller 31A. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 and 8-18, the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 (rear base 604) includes wiring C, connector CN, controller sensor unit 35A, and push button CN that the actual rear base 604 has. Since the display of the component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 is spoiled by the electronic component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the wiring C and the connector CN. can be suppressed. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

In addition, in production pattern B, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed in order to be assembled, and as shown in FIGS. By displaying the component image ZA5 corresponding to the component A5 in a manner in which it is assembled after the component images ZA1 to ZA4, it is possible to appropriately draw attention to the stick controller 31A and to most recognize the stick controller 31A. By displaying the easy-to-assemble part image ZA5 at the end, it becomes difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end, which improves interest.

Furthermore, the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZA1 to ZA4. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility for the player is higher than that of the other component images ZA1 to ZA4 is, for example, the mode in which the component image ZA5 is attached to the component image ZA1 as shown in FIG. 8-18(E). , the component image ZA5 is displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image is displayed around the component image ZA5 to emphasize it, or the image display device 5 is moved from the peripheral edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center. , etc., in which the player can more easily identify the parts than the other parts images ZA1 to ZA4. By displaying in this manner, the production effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the controller assembly effect includes effect patterns A and B that display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in a manner that they are assembled to the component image ZA1, and the component image ZA5 that is assembled to the component image ZA1. When the effect patterns A and B for finally displaying the completed controller image Z1 are determined including the effect patterns C and D in which the completed controller image Z1 is not displayed by displaying in a non-attached mode, A big win is achieved at a higher rate than the effect patterns C and D in which the finally completed controller image Z1 is not displayed. Therefore, the player can expect success (completion) of the assembly effect, and thus the interest is improved.

Also, even if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the push button 31B may be determined as the operation target, or the effect patterns A and C in which the characteristic part A4 is not assembled last may be selected. Otherwise, the performance patterns C and D, which are not completed due to failure in assembly, may be selected, so that the player's expectation for the big win can be maintained regardless of which performance pattern is selected. can.

Further, in this characterizing section 063SG, as an effect pattern for the controller assembly effect, one of the effect patterns A to D is selected as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any one of a plurality of effect patterns including other effect patterns with different component types, component assembly orders, etc. may be selectable.

In the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279 in FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120 determines which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid based on the result of the variable display, and whether to execute the controller assembly effect. The presence or absence and, if executed, which of production patterns A to D is to be executed is determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9(A), the effect control CPU 120 activates the operation unit (operation As a target), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 80%, and the push button 31B is determined at a rate of 20%. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is a loss variation pattern (when the variable display result is a loss), the stick controller 31A is determined at a rate of 20% as the operation unit (operation target) whose operation is valid, and the push button 31B. is determined at a rate of 80%. In this way, when the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective at the end of the battle production, the hit is more likely to occur than when the operation of the push button 31B becomes effective. High degree.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9(B), when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target, the effect control CPU 120 determines non-execution of the controller assembly effect at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern A is determined. It is determined at a rate of 25%, effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 60%, and effect patterns C and D are each determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined to be operated, non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, effect patterns A and B are each determined at a rate of 5%, and effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%. The ratio is determined, and the production pattern D is determined at a ratio of 20%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 stores in the RAM 122 the type of the determined operation target, whether or not to execute the controller assembly performance, and the type of the determined performance patterns A to D in the case of execution. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target, the controller assembly effect is executed at a higher rate than when the controller assembly effect is not executed, and the effect patterns A and B that succeed in assembly fail to assemble. On the other hand, when the operation target is determined to be the push button 31B, the controller assembly effect is not executed at a higher rate than when the operation target is determined to be the stick controller 31A. In addition, even when execution of the controller assembly performance is determined, performance patterns C and D in which assembly fails are determined at a higher rate than performance patterns A and B in which assembly succeeds.

Therefore, if the controller assembly effect is executed and the assembly is successful, the ratio of the big win is higher than if the controller assembly effect is not executed or if the assembly is unsuccessful. Also, if the controller assembly effect is not executed, the failure rate is higher than if the assembly succeeds. That is, the performance patterns A and B that are successfully assembled have a higher reliability of big win than the performance patterns C and D that are unsuccessfully assembled. A performance pattern B that succeeds in assembling has a higher reliability of big win than a performance pattern A that succeeds in assembling, and a performance pattern C that fails in assembling has a lower reliability of big win than a performance pattern D that fails in assembling. Therefore, the performance pattern B, the performance pattern A, the performance pattern D, and the performance pattern C are set so that the reliability of the big win increases in this order. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the variable display result is a big win, the effect control CPU 120 selects the stick controller 31A as the operation target at a higher rate than the push button 31B, and when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, assembly is performed. Since the performance patterns A and B that succeed in assembling are selected at a higher rate than the performance patterns C and D that fail in assembling, if the controller assembly performance succeeds and the operation of the stick controller 31A becomes effective, a big win is achieved at a high rate. .

Further, in the operation prompting effect, the operation prompting notification is given by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 at the start timing of the operation effective period as shown in FIGS. In addition, by performing the controller assembly effect before these operation prompting notifications are performed, that is, before the operation effective period starts, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stick controller 31A for performing the operation. Therefore, it is possible to notify in advance that the valid operation period will start, especially for players who have little experience in playing games. Furthermore, instead of displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. Since it becomes possible to make it conscious, interest can be suitably improved.

Incidentally, when it is determined not to execute the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, the controller assembly effect is not started even at the start timing of the controller assembly effect. By displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 as shown in 19B, the operation prompting notification is performed.

Further, in this characteristic portion 063SG, an example has been exemplified in which non-execution of the controller assembly effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this. ZA5 may be displayed, but the mode of assembling these component images ZA1 to ZA5 may not be displayed, that is, a presentation pattern in which the mode of non-assembling is displayed may be selectable.

Further, after the button part images corresponding to the parts constituting the push button 31B are displayed, the button part images are displayed in the form of assembling, and after starting the push button assembly presentation, before or after the assembly is completed, the push button is pushed. It may have an effect pattern that fails to assemble by displaying the button image Z3 in a disassembled manner.

Furthermore, after the push button image Z3 is displayed in a disassembled manner, the controller assembling effect may be started to display the controller image Z1 after successful assembly.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (F) and 8-18 (G), after displaying the state of assembling the final component images ZA4 and ZA5, the assembled controller image Z1 is displayed for the game machine. The manner in which the frame 3 is assembled to the glass door frame or the like may be displayed.

(Parts assembly performance)
In this characteristic portion 063SG, the effect control CPU 120, before starting the operation promoting effect in the super ready-to-win effect, creates a related effect image related to the effect image (the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3) used for the operation promoting effect. After the stepwise display, any one of the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is displayed. It is possible to execute a part set effect that can be specified as to whether it will be executed.

The stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are composed of a plurality of parts (members) as described with reference to FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3. Part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to five parts A1 to A5 out of the plurality of parts, and part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to five parts C1 to C5 out of the plurality of parts constituting the push button 31B, As related effect images related to the effect images (the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3) used for the operation promotion effect, they are sequentially displayed step by step one by one during the execution period of the battle effect.

Then, when all or part of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A are displayed in the part gathering effect, there is a high possibility that the operation of the stick controller 31A will be promoted in the subsequent operation promoting effect. It is suggested that when all or part of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B are displayed, there is a high possibility that the operation of the push button 31B will be promoted in the subsequent operation promotion effect. be. That is, in the part gathering effect executed before the operation promoting effect is executed, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step, so that the operation is promoted in the operation promoting effect. It suggests (becomes identifiable) whether the unit is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, the effect control CPU 120, when displaying the battle effect image Z50 for the battle effect in the display area of the image display device 5, causes the battle effect image Z50 in the display area. A plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are arranged one by one and displayed in a specific display area Z51 above.

When displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, first, it is determined which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B. After being displayed in a difficult-to-identify, difficult-to-identify mode, it changes to an identifiable mode in which it is possible to identify which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button 31B. After that, the display mode is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) and (B), both the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B are displayed. The display mode changes in a plurality of steps (for example, four steps) in accordance with the passage of time from the start of the display.

Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette different in external shape and surface from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. It is displayed in a common silhouette form in which white characters "?" are displayed. The common silhouette mode is a mode that is commonly used when displaying component images for either stick controller 31A or push button 31B.

In the third stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in a black individual silhouette form. The individual silhouette mode is a non-common mode that is separately used when displaying the component image of the stick controller 31A and when displaying the component image of the push button 31B.

At the fourth stage, the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B are displayed in icon mode. In the fourth stage, the parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in white in a normal mode, and the parts A1 to A5 and parts C1 to C5 are shown in different colors (for example, red), and flames are displayed around them. It is possible to display a special mode of displaying the effect image shown.

When the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in order, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of each component image in the order of the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. . For example, using moving image display, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 in the first stage may be gradually changed to the display mode of the component images in the second stage, the third stage, and the fourth stage. After displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 of the first stage, the display is switched (updated) to the component images of the second, third, and fourth stages each time a predetermined time elapses. You may change an aspect.

In this way, in the first to third stages, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in the silhouette form, that is, the player can identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. is displayed in a difficult-to-distinguish manner, and in the fourth stage, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, the player can identify which component image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. displayed in an identifiable manner. Therefore, from the start of the display of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, the player cannot predict which component image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed. can attract interest as to how the part images are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-11, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as the special effect images are the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect. As a mode in which it is difficult to identify which of the promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is to be executed, the part images of the first to third steps are targeted, but the third step As for the component images, it is possible to identify them by comparing the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B.

Here, an example of a component assembly effect that displays the component images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B will be described. As shown in FIG. A specific display area Z51 in the shape of a horizontally long rectangle is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing when a predetermined time has passed since is displayed (first step). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(B), the part image ZC1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-14(C) , the part image ZC1 is displayed in the form of an individual silhouette (third step), and then the part image ZC1 is displayed in the form of an icon as shown in FIG. 8-14(D) (fourth step).

Further, when the component image ZC1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC2 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (D) to (G)). Further, when the component image ZC2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC3 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (G) to (J)). Further, when the component image ZC3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC4 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-14 (J) to (M)). Further, when the component image ZC4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZC5 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZC1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q)).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (M) to (Q), the last component image ZC5 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed to the second mode in the same manner as the component image ZC1. When changing from the 1st stage to the 4th stage, the surroundings of the part image ZC5 are highlighted, such as by blinking, so that the change to the 4th stage produces an effect that encourages whether or not the assembly will be successful. may

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, or the number of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases. By increasing, the display mode of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(Q), when the component image ZC5 is displayed in the icon form, all the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, after the component image ZC4 is displayed in the silhouette mode in FIGS. is not displayed and the collection of parts may fail.

In addition, to explain the component gathering effect of displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. , a horizontally long rectangular specific display area Z51 is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, and the part image ZA1 is displayed in a black circular common silhouette mode on the left side of the specific display area Z51. (first step). Next, as shown in FIG. 8-15(B), the part image ZA1 is changed from a black circular shape to a black non-circular common silhouette mode (second stage), and as shown in FIG. 8-15(C) , the part image ZA1 is displayed in the form of an individual silhouette (third step), and then the part image ZA1 is displayed in the form of an icon as shown in FIG. 8-15(D) (fourth step).

Further, when the component image ZA1 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA2 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (D) to (G)). Further, when the component image ZA2 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA3 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-15 (G) to (J)). Further, when the component image ZA3 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA4 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage in the same manner as the component image ZA1. It is changed up to the fourth stage (Fig. 8-15 (J) to (M)). Further, when the component image ZA4 is displayed in the icon mode, the next component image ZA5 is displayed in the black circular common silhouette mode (first stage), and the display mode is changed from the first stage to the It is changed up to the fourth stage (FIGS. 8-15 (M) to (Q)).

In this way, the display mode of each component image ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 changes from the first stage to the fourth stage, or the number of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 increases. By increasing, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 gradually changes. When the component image ZA5 is displayed in the icon form as shown in FIG. 8-15(Q), all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the assembly of the components is successful. On the other hand, for example, after the component image ZA4 is displayed in the silhouette mode in FIGS. is not displayed and the collection of parts may fail.

In this embodiment, when the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in stages, one component image is displayed and changed from the first step to the fourth step, and then the other images are displayed. Although the form in which the component images are displayed in order has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. While changing to the 2nd or 3rd stage where it is difficult to display, the other part images are changed to the 2nd or 3rd stage in the same way. It is also possible to change the display mode of at least a part of the component images among the plurality of component images that are displayed up to the fourth stage. By doing so, it is not possible to know which part image of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B will be displayed until the predetermined number of part images are displayed, so that the player's interest can be maintained. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the form in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51 which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 was exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a display area other than the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a sub-image display device provided separately from the image display device 5). good too.

As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the component assembly effect to a plurality of effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 and PT2-1 in which the type of the component image and the change in the display mode of the component image are different. It is made executable based on any one of ∼3.

In the effect pattern PT1-1, the part images ZC1 to ZC3 of the push button 31B change step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon, but finally the part images ZC4 and ZC5 are not displayed and are gathered. is a pattern of failure. The effect pattern PT1-2 changes step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed and the assembly is successful. It's a pattern. The effect patterns PT1-3 change step by step in the order of the common silhouette, the individual silhouette, and the icon (effect mode) for the part images ZC1 to ZC5 of the push button 31B, and finally all the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed. It is the pattern that aggregation succeeds.

In the effect pattern PT2-1, the part images ZA1 to ZA3 of the stick controller 31A change step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon, but finally the part images ZA4 and ZA5 are not displayed and are aggregated. is a pattern of failure. The production pattern PT2-2 changes step by step in the order of common silhouette, individual silhouette, and icon for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 of the stick controller 31A, and finally all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed and the gathering is successful. It's a pattern. Effect patterns PT2-3 change step by step in the order of common silhouettes, individual silhouettes, and icons (effect modes) for component images ZA1 to ZA5 of stick controller 31A, and finally all component images ZA1 to ZA5 are displayed. It is the pattern that aggregation succeeds.

After completing the operation promotion effect pattern determination processing of 063SGS279 in FIG. Make a decision.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is to be operated for the operation promotion effect in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279. Depending on the number, one of a plurality of component set effect patterns is determined.

Specifically, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 3%. , the performance pattern PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, the performance pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 7%, the performance pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 10%, and the performance pattern PT2-2 is determined at 30%. %, and the performance pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 40%.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, the non-execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the effect pattern PT1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, and the effect pattern is determined. PT1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, performance pattern PT1-3 is determined at a rate of 15%, performance pattern PT2-1 is determined at a rate of 7%, and performance pattern PT2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%. , and the performance pattern PT2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%.

When the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the parts assembly performance, it sets a parts assembly performance execution determination flag and stores the determined types of performance patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 in the RAM122. Note that the above determination ratio is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed by the push button 31B. is determined at a rate higher than that of the production patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 that display the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to , and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target for the operation promotion production. Effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 displaying the corresponding part images ZC1 to ZC5 are determined at a higher rate than the effect patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 displaying the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A. do.

In this way, the component assembly effect determines whether the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect is the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3, that is, whether the operation object in the operation promotion effect is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. This is an effect that suggests by stepwise displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3.

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, it is highly likely that execution of the controller assembly effect is determined, so all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A are displayed. Effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 that are successfully assembled are determined at a higher rate than the effect pattern PT2-1 that is unsuccessfully assembled. In other words, when the assembly success part assembly presentation based on the presentation patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3 is executed, the operation rate is higher than when the assembly failure parts assembly presentation is executed based on the presentation pattern PT2-1. In the promotion effect, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect.

Further, when the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to gather are replaced by the effect patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2- that succeed in gathering. 2 and 2-3, the push button image Z3 is displayed in the operation prompting effect when the component assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed. likely to

Further, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target of the operation promoting effect, there is a high possibility that the result of the variable display is a big hit. When the execution ratio increases in the order of PT2-2 and PT2-3, and the push button 31B is determined as the operation target of the operation promotion effect, there is a high possibility that the variable display result is a failure, so the effect pattern PT2-3. , PT2-2, PT2-1, PT1-3, PT1-2, and PT1-1. Therefore, the performance patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3, PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3 are set so as to increase the reliability (expectation) of the big hit.

In this way, when the stick controller 31A is determined as the operation target for the operation promoting effect, execution of the parts assembly effect is determined at a higher rate than when the push button 31B is determined. is determined, the variable display result is a failure, or even if the execution of the controller assembly effect has not been determined, the execution may be determined.

Further, in the characteristic portion 063SG, the display mode of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 (special effect images) displayed in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect is a special display mode (all When the display mode changes to the group success display mode in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 or the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed), the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted in the operation promotion effect at a higher rate than when the special display mode is not used. Although the form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the operation of the stick controller 31A is set to be promoted in the operation promoting effect when the special display mode is entered. For example, when the special display mode is entered, the operation is promoted at a higher rate than the push button 31B. The effect may be set so that the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted.

Returning to FIG. 8-8, the effect control CPU 120, after executing the parts set effect pattern determination process at 063SGS280, determines whether or not the parts set effect execution flag is set (063SGS281). When the parts assembly performance execution flag is set, the parts assembly performance start waiting timer is set to the time until the parts assembly performance start start (063SGS282), the parts assembly performance execution determination flag is set, and the parts assembly performance execution flag is set. (063SGS283). In addition, when the part assembly effect execution flag is not set in 063SGS281, the process proceeds to 063SGS284 as it is. Then, an effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the content determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process is selected (063SGS284), and the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (063SGS285).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (063SGS286). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to commands.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (063SGS287). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (063SGS288). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (063SGS289).

FIG. 8-12 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer (063SGS301, 063SGS302, 063SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the notice effect is set (it is decided to perform the notice effect) or the flag during execution of the notice effect is set (during the execution of the notice effect). Yes), the notice effect process may be executed.

In 063SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (063SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer (063SGS308). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (063SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (for performance (063SGS309b).

Next, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination process of 063SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 promotes the operation based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. A process for executing an effect is performed (063SGS310). In addition, when execution of the parts set effect is determined in the parts set effect pattern determination process of 063SGS280, the parts set effect is executed based on the determined effect pattern at the execution timing of the parts set effect ( 063 SGS310a). Further, when the execution of the operation promotion effect is determined in the operation promotion effect pattern determination processing of 063SGS279, the operation promotion effect is executed based on the determined assembly effect pattern at the execution timing of the operation promotion effect. (063 SGS310).

Then, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (063SGS311). When the variable display control timer has timed out (063SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). Image data for the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (063SGS312). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to a predetermined value (063SGS313).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (063SGS311; N), after executing 063SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (063SGS314). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (063SGS315; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (063SGS316). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the fluctuation. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n expires in the processing of 063SGS306, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decorative pattern variable display control based on the process table is finish.

(Firing operation promotion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 shoots the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 when the big hit game state or the time saving state is started in the shooting operation promotion effect processing of 063SGS162 shown in FIG. 8-7. A shooting operation promotion performance A and a shooting operation promotion performance B prompting the player to do so are executed. In addition, when the time-saving state ends and is controlled to the normal game state (low probability low base state), a left-handed notification prompting the game ball to be shot so that the game ball flows down the first path K1. Execute.

An example of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the jackpot game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-20 and 8-21. FIG. 8-20 is a timing chart explaining an example of the effect in the jackpot game state. FIG. 8-21 is a diagram for explaining the flow of effects from the start of the jackpot game state to the normal game state via the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, when the display result of the variable display in the normal game state (or time saving state) is a big hit (for example, a non-probable variable big hit) (see FIG. 8-21 (A)), for production control The CPU 120 starts a jackpot start effect (fanfare effect) at timing Ta0 when an effect control command designating the start of a big hit game state is received in the special figure win waiting process of 063SGS173 shown in FIG. 8-7. In a fanfare period (execution period of pre-processing for opening a big win) from a timing Ta0 at which a performance control command is received to a timing Ta2 at which a round game is started, first, after executing a big win start performance indicating that a big win has occurred, a big win is won. At a timing Ta1 when a predetermined time has passed after the start effect is started, a shooting operation promotion effect A is started to prompt the game ball to be shot so that the game ball flows down the second path K2 (see FIG. 8-22). ).

In the shooting operation promotion effect A, after the handle assembly effect described later is executed, a right-hand shot operation is notified during the period from the timing Ta2 when the handle assembly effect ends to the timing Ta3 when the round game is started. I do.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the big hit (performance during the round) in the round game period (execution period of the process during the opening of the big win) from the timing Ta2 when the fanfare period ends to the timing Ta4 when the round game ends ( (See Fig. 8-21(B)). Then, in the ending period (execution period of processing after opening the big win) from the timing Ta4 when the round game period ends to the timing Ta7 when the big win game state ends, first, the big win ends and the time saving state (chance time) is entered. After executing the big hit end effect indicating that (see FIG. 8-21 (C)), at timing Ta5 when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the mid-round effect, the game ball flows down the second path K2. A shooting operation prompting effect B for prompting shooting of the game ball is started (see FIGS. 8-23 and 8-24).

In the shooting operation promotion effect B, after executing the path assembly effect described later, a right hitting operation is notified during a period from timing Ta6 when the path setting effect ends to timing Ta7 when the jackpot game state ends. I do.

In addition, the time-saving state (low probability base state), the effect image Z10 corresponding to the time saving state, the variable display image Z11 of the decoration pattern, the remaining fluctuation number image Z12 of the time saving state, and the notification image Z13 consisting of "right hitting" and "→" indicating right hitting. and are displayed (see FIG. 8-21(D)).

At the timing Ta8 when the 100th variable display is completed from the end of the jackpot game state, after displaying the notification image Z14 indicating that the time saving state has ended (see FIG. 8-21 (E)), a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing Ta8. Until timing Ta9 elapses, "Please return to left-handed hitting", "←" and the hitting ball operation handle to prompt the game ball to be shot (return to left-handed hitting) so that the game ball flows down the first path K1 A notification image Z15 consisting of a steering wheel image simulating 30 is displayed, and a left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is performed by outputting a voice saying "Please return to left-handed hitting" from the speakers 8L and 8R (Fig. 8-21 (F)).

In addition, in this feature part 063SG, although the case where it is controlled to the low probability high base state after the end of the non-probability variable jackpot has been described, even if it is controlled to the high probability high base state after the end of the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B At the start of the big win, the shooting operation promotion performance A is executed, and at the end of the big win, the shooting operation promotion performance B is executed, but even if the 100th variable display is completed without the occurrence of the big win from the end of the big win game state. Since the high-precision high base state continues, the left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) is not performed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect, which will be described later, when performing the left-hand hitting notification (left-hand hitting operation promoting effect).

(Handle assembly performance)
Next, the handle assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 8-22. 8-22, (A) to (E) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the handle assembly effect in the firing operation prompting effect A, and (F) is a diagram showing the notification of hitting to the right.

The ball-striking operation handle 30 is composed of a plurality of parts (members), as explained with reference to FIG. The effect is to display the component images ZB1 to ZB4 to be assembled.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E), the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 is attached to the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the glass door frame of the gaming machine frame 3. After displaying in the mode, the part image ZB2 corresponding to the part B2 is displayed on the part image ZB1 in the mode of assembling, the part image ZB3 corresponding to the part B3 is displayed on the part image ZB1 in the mode of assembling, and the part By displaying the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 to the image ZB1 in a manner in which it is assembled, the complete image ZB5 of the ball-hitting operation handle 30 using all the part images ZB1 to ZB4 is finally displayed. be.

In the notification of hitting to the right, a handle image Z17 for rotating the hitting operation handle 30 in the right direction and a right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow displaying text information "Hit right!" are displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a voice saying "Please hit right". Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 for prompting right hitting during execution of the steering wheel assembly effect and right hitting notification.

Also, the assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in these handle assembly presentations will be described with reference to FIGS. Since the assembly order is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, the production effect can be enhanced. The assembly order of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 in the steering wheel assembly presentation may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Further, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) constituting the ball-hitting handle 30. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the part image ZB1 corresponding to the part B1 (handle base 720) includes wiring C, connector CN and touch ring 728 that the actual handle base 720 has, a handle sensor (not shown), Since the display of the electronic component images corresponding to the electronic components such as the one-shot switch 725 is omitted (not displayed), the appearance of the component images ZB1 to ZB4 is spoiled by the component images corresponding to the components such as the wiring C and the connector CN. can be suppressed. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

Also, in the handle assembly effect, the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4, which is more characteristic than the parts B1 to B3, is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3. , and by displaying the parts image ZB4, which is the easiest to recognize as the ball-hitting operation handle 30, at the end, it is possible to make it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. improves.

Furthermore, the component image ZB4 may be displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the other component images ZB1 to ZB3. Specifically, the mode in which the visibility of the component image ZB4 is higher for the player than the other component images ZB1 to ZB3 is, for example, when the component image ZB4 is displayed in an assembly mode, the component image ZB4 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or the component image ZB4 is displayed in an enlarged manner. An effect image is displayed around the image ZB4 to emphasize the image, or the display area of the image display device 5 is moved from the periphery toward the center. Includes aspects that make it easy to identify parts. By displaying in this manner, the production effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the steering wheel assembling effect is to assemble the part images ZB1 to ZB4 to the door frame image Z16 in a manner other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the part images ZB1 to ZB4 are assembled to the door frame image Z16 in the above order. and an effect pattern to be displayed in a mode.

Also, in the handle assembling effect, all the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are not used, and the assembly fails, and after displaying the unfinished image of the ball-striking operation handle 30, the assembly is started again and the completed image ZB5 is displayed. You may make it

(Route assembly production)
Next, the route assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 8-23. 8-23 are diagrams for explaining the flow of the path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect B (A) to (F). 8-24, (G) to (K) are diagrams for explaining the flow of the game ball flowing effect in the shooting operation promotion effect B, and (L) is a diagram showing right-handed notification.

The second path K2 is configured by arranging a plurality of parts (members) on the game board 2 and on the game board 2, as described with reference to FIG. 8-1. 2, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 respectively corresponding to the four parts D1 to D4 out of the plurality of parts including . In the following, the part constituting the special variable winning ball device 7 is the part D1, the part constituting the variable winning ball device 6B is the part D2, the part constituting the passage gate 41 is the part D3, and the part of the second path K2 is A passage component (passage member) to be formed will be referred to as a component D4 and will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E), the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the component D1 in a manner in which it is attached to the game board image Z20, A part image ZD2 corresponding to the part D2 is displayed on the game board image Z20 in a manner of assembling, a part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is displayed on the game board image Z20, and a part image ZD3 corresponding to the part D3 is displayed on the game board image Z20. By displaying the component image ZD4 corresponding to D4 in a manner in which it is assembled, the route image corresponding to the second route K2 (for example, at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the component images ZD1 to ZD4 can be used. This is an effect that displays the route image).

In addition, the assembly order of the part images ZD1 to ZD4 in these path assembly presentations is the actual assembly in the manufacturing process, in order to provide a presentation presentation in an easy-to-understand way for the player to see that the second path K2 is being assembled. Since the order is different from the order, the production effect can be enhanced. Incidentally, the assembly order of the part images ZD1 to ZD4 in the path assembly rendering may be the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process.

Furthermore, the component D4 {passage component (passage member)} is actually formed integrally with the center decorative frame 5c, but in the route assembly effect, it is a component formed separately from the center decorative frame 5c. By being displayed as image ZD4, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are images that do not include some of the multiple components (members) forming the second route K2. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-23, part image ZD1 corresponding to part D1 (special variable winning ball device 7), part image ZD2 corresponding to part D2 (variable winning ball device 6B), part D3 (passage gate 41 ), the display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, etc. actually possessed by each component is omitted (not displayed). It is possible to prevent the appearance of the ZD4 from being spoiled by component images corresponding to components such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, and the like. It should be noted that display of parts other than electronic parts may be omitted.

In addition, in the path assembly effect, the part image ZC4 corresponding to the part D4, which is more characteristic than the parts D1 to D3, is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled after the part images ZD1 to ZD3, making it suitable for the second path K2. , and the part image ZD4, which is the easiest to recognize as the second route K2, is displayed last, making it difficult to predict what will be assembled until the end. improves. The “characteristic part” is a part that the player can most easily recognize (specify) as a passage part (passage member) that constitutes a part of the second route K2.

Specifically, the part D4 (passage member) is A.P. B. being a member constituting a path along which game balls flow; C. It should be a shape that makes it easy to remember that it is a path. D. being larger than the other parts D1 to D3 (the area occupied by the entire second path K2 is large); E. The part must be arranged in a conspicuous position for the player; It includes parts and the like that satisfy at least one condition (for example, conditions A and B here) of being a device that a player aims to win. Therefore, for example, if the player is to be encouraged to win a prize in the variable winning ball device 6B, the component image ZD2 is displayed as a characteristic component in such a manner that it is assembled after the component images ZD1, ZD3, and ZD4. can be

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the game board 2 (game area Y) has a model-specific part unique to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game board image Z20 corresponding to such a game board 2, When the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame is displayed in the route assembly presentation or the handle assembly presentation, it is preferable to display at least part of the model-specific portion.

The model-specific portion includes a game information display portion that displays game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the number of winning balls, the probability of a big hit, the model name (title name), etc.), an obstacle nail, a windmill, etc. obstacles, movable bodies for presentation, decorative parts, etc., which are provided in the game area Y so as to be visible to the player. Therefore, when these are displayed in the route assembly effect, they correspond to the pachinko game machine 1, but the model name (title name) is the same, but the game performance (specifications) such as the number of prize balls and the probability of big wins are different. When a pachinko machine or another pachinko machine with a different model name (title name) executes a route assembly effect, information different from the actual one is provided to the player, giving the player a sense of incongruity. Assembly performance cannot be used in common for a plurality of types of pachinko game machines.

However, as shown in FIG. 8-23(E), when displaying the game information image Z21 corresponding to the game information display portion in which the number of prize balls, the probability of a big hit, the model name (title name), etc. are displayed, By displaying the game information in a manner that makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to specify (for example, not displaying, blurring, or painting out), it is possible to execute the same route assembly performance among a plurality of types of machines.

In addition, the route assembly effect includes the component images ZD1 to ZD4 being assembled to the game board image Z20 in a manner other than the above procedure, in addition to the effect pattern displayed in the manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20 in the above order. and an effect pattern to be displayed in a mode.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a route assembly effect for displaying a mode of assembling the part image ZD4 to the game board image Z20, and after displaying the character image Z22 as shown in FIG. 8-23(F), As shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J), a route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed so that the player can recognize it, and the route image is displayed in a manner in which game balls flow down. Start the streaming performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-24 (G), an image in which the game ball moves toward the right side is displayed above the game area Y, and as shown in FIG. 8-24 (H), the game area Y 8-24(I), the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and moves toward the variable winning ball device 6B. is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-24(J), an image is displayed in which the game ball wins the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result, the player can be recognizably notified that the game ball can pass through the passage gate 41 and win the variable winning ball device 6B by striking to the right. When displaying the image in which these game balls move, an arrow image Z6 indicating the flow path of the game ball is displayed in addition to the game ball.

Incidentally, the game board image Z20 shown in FIG. 8-24(G) is a movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32 which would otherwise be a model-specific part (for example, the shaded area in FIG. 8-24(G)). ), but the movable body 32 is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult (or impossible) for the player to identify it (for example, a blurred image or a deformed image of the movable body 32). Further, the display of the movable body image corresponding to the movable body 32, which is the model-specific part, may be omitted, or the display of only the characteristic parts may be omitted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-24(K), after the character image Z22 is displayed, as shown in FIG. An image Z17, a right arrow image Z18 corresponding to the right arrow displayed with character information "Right shot!" Output. Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays a right arrow image Z5 for prompting a right hit during execution of the path assembly effect and the right hit information.

In this way, in the shooting operation promotion effect A and the shooting operation promotion effect B, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. By displaying the steering wheel image Z17 and the right arrow image Z18, not only is the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) performed, but the steering wheel is operated before the right-handed notification, that is, before the right-handed operation is started. By performing the assembly effect and the path assembly effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hitting ball operation handle 30 for performing the right-hand hitting operation and the second path K2 along which the game ball flows down due to the right-hand hitting. It is possible to inform in advance that a player or the like who is inexperienced in playing the ball will need a right-handed operation. Furthermore, instead of displaying the right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) image shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. Since it is possible to make the player aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation, it is possible to favorably improve the amusement.

In addition, it is conceivable to set a long jackpot fanfare period or ending period in advance so that the player does not get a large number of balls in a short time. ) or setting a long execution period of the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. However, by setting the execution of the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect as the firing operation promotion effect A and the firing operation promotion effect B, it is possible to prevent the firing operation promotion effect from appearing to be sluggish. It is possible to appropriately notify that the start timing of the hitting operation has arrived.

In addition, by setting the execution period of the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion presentation) long, the player is fully aware of the start timing of the right-hand hitting operation even without performing the steering wheel assembly performance and the path assembly performance. However, if the right-throwing notification image is displayed before the right-throwing operation start timing, the right-throwing operation is started before the right-throwing operation start timing, and the player wastes hitting. However, by executing the steering wheel assembling effect and the path assembling effect, it is possible to start the right-handed operation at a suitable timing while making the player aware of the start timing of the right-handed operation.

(First invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that allows a game to be played by shooting a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area The game ball has a first route and a second route different from the first route, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the game ball flows down the second route and becomes more advantageous than flowing down the first route. (Time-saving state, etc.), before the advantageous state starts, promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path is possible. There were things. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, the attraction is not improved because the promotional effect is monotonous by only prompting the shooting of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the first invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a shooting operation unit (for example, a ball hitting operation handle 30) for performing a game medium shooting operation;
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The firing operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4),
The promotion effect executing means, in the promotion effect, a first component image (eg, component image ZB1) related to the first component and a second component image (eg, component image ZB4) related to the second component. is displayed, and a specific component image (for example, a complete image ZB5, etc.) using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the handle In the assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4 in the form of assembly, a portion that can finally display a completed image ZB5 of the ball hitting operation handle 30 using all the part images ZB1 to ZB4. -22 (A) ~ (E) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the steering wheel assembly presentation, by displaying the part images ZB1 to ZB4, that is, by displaying an unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not time to start the right-handed operation. By displaying the complete image ZB5 in which these component images are finally assembled, the right-hand hitting operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The game machine of means 2 of the first invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a shooting operation unit (for example, a ball hitting operation handle 30) for performing a game medium shooting operation;
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The firing operation unit is composed of a plurality of parts (for example, parts B1 to B4) including a first part (for example, part B1) and a second part (for example, part B4),
The promotion effect executing means can sequentially display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can , In the steering wheel assembly effect, a portion that displays the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 in a manner in which they are assembled sequentially (see FIGS. 8-22 (A) to (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the steering wheel assembly effect before executing the right-hand hitting notification (right-hand hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the steering wheel assembly effect, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are displayed in order, that is, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 are individually displayed and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the right-handed operation is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying the completed image ZB5 in which these component images are finally assembled, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The plurality of parts includes third parts (for example, electronic parts such as wiring C, connector CN and touch ring 728 of handle base 720, handle sensor (not shown), single switch 725),
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the part B1 (handle base 720) in the handle assembly effect. The component image ZB1 omits display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as the wiring C, the connector CN, the touch ring 728, the handle sensor (not shown), the one-shot switch 725, etc. that the actual handlebar base 720 has ( not shown) part.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The second part (e.g., part B4) is a more characteristic part than the first part (e.g., part B1),
The promotion effect execution means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second component image after the first component image in the steering wheel assembly effect). A part that displays the part image ZB4 corresponding to the part B4 in a manner that it is assembled after the part images ZB1 to ZB3.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the performance effect.
More specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the ball hitting operation handle 30 has been completed, that is, that it is time to start hitting to the right in a display manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) includes a model-specific part (for example, game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ), etc.), obstacles such as obstacle nails and windmills, movable objects for production, decorative parts, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means may display a game area image related to the game area in the promotion effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2, the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame, etc. in the path assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least part of the model-specific part is omitted and displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the same promotion effect among a plurality of types of machine models.
Specifically, since the model-specific portion is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same path assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on different machine models without giving the player a sense of incongruity. be able to run.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect that prompts the player to shoot the game media so that the game media flow down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, left-handed information can be executed, see Fig. 8-21 (F)),
The first component image and the second component image are not displayed in the special promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state The part that does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect before doing (see Fig. 8-21 (F))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness.
Specifically, when the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example, a big win game state, a time saving state, etc.), the handle assembly effect or the path assembly effect is performed, while the state is controlled from the state advantageous to the player to the disadvantageous state. The player can be made to recognize that the game state has changed by not performing the steering wheel assembling effect or the path assembling effect when the game is played.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which they are combined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls a plurality of A part capable of executing a steering wheel assembling effect displaying part images ZB1 to ZB4 corresponding to four parts B1 to B4 of the parts, respectively, in an assembling manner.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start hitting to the right when the ball hitting operation handle 30 is completed by assembling, in addition to showing a plurality of component images.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 7,
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure,
The promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZB1 in the steering wheel assembly effect). The assembly order of ZB4 is the same as the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process described with reference to FIGS. are in a different order.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, it can be presented in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 7 or 8,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in a combination mode, and then causes the game medium to fire the operation component image corresponding to the shooting operation unit. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect, the hitting operation handle as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. 8-24 (L) A portion for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that the player 30 is rotated rightward.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to provide the player with a more comprehensible indication that it is time to start the right-handed operation.

(Second Invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a second invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that allows a game to be played by shooting a game ball into the game area, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-60565, for example, as a flow path flowing down the game area The game ball has a first route and a second route different from the first route, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the game ball flows down the second route and becomes more advantageous than flowing down the first route. (Time-saving state, etc.), before the advantageous state starts, promotion effect (right-handed notification) that encourages shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path is possible. There were things. In the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent publication, the attraction is not improved because the promotional effect is monotonous by only prompting the shooting of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the second path. was there. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (eg, game board 2) and second parts (eg, parts D1 to D4),
The promotion effect executing means, in the promotion effect, performs a first component image related to the first component (eg, game board image Z20) and a second component image related to the second component (eg, component images ZD1 to ZD1). ZD4), and a specific component image (for example, a route image, etc.) using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image can be displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 , in the route assembly effect, by displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in a manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled to the game board image Z20, a route image corresponding to the second route K2 (for example, the game board image Z20 and the component image ZD1 A part that can display a route image using at least a part of ~ ZD4 (see FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the second route, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the path assembly effect before executing the right hitting notification (right hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the second path K2 along which the game ball flows down, the player can perform the right-handed operation without panicking when the right-handed operation start timing comes. Become.
In addition, in the route assembly effect, by displaying the part images ZD1 to ZD4, that is, by displaying an unfinished image, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not time to start the right-handed operation. By displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the second invention is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing by shooting game media (e.g., game balls) into a game area (e.g., game area Y),
a first route (for example, first route K1) through which game media shot into the game area can flow and a second route (for example, second route K2) different from the first route;
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a launch operation promotion effect A at the start of a big win part) and
with
The second path is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (eg, game board 2) and second parts (eg, parts D1 to D4),
The promotion effect executing means can sequentially display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can , A portion for displaying the component images ZD1 to ZD4 in a manner in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are sequentially assembled (see FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the firing operation section, thereby improving interest.
Specifically, by performing the path assembly effect before executing the right-handed hitting notification (right-handed hitting operation promotion effect) shown in FIG. By making the player sufficiently conscious of the ball hitting operation handle 30 for performing the ball hitting operation, the player can perform the right hitting operation without panicking when the start timing of the right hitting operation comes.
In addition, in the route assembly effect, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in order, that is, the part images ZD1 to ZD4 are individually displayed and the completed image is not shown, so that the start timing of the right-handed operation is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled on the game board image Z20, the right-handed operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The plurality of parts includes third parts (for example, electronic parts such as solenoids, switches, wiring, connectors, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means does not display the third component image related to the third component in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image ZD1 corresponding to the parts D1 to D4 in the route assembly effect). ∼ ZD4 and game board image Z20 are portions where display of electronic component images corresponding to electronic components such as solenoids, switches, wires, connectors, etc. actually possessed by each component is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The second part is a part more characteristic than the first part,
The promotion effect executing means displays the second component image after the first component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component image more characteristic than the parts D1 to D3 in the route assembly effect). A part that displays a part image ZD4 corresponding to a particular part D4 in a manner in which the part image ZD4 is assembled after the part images ZD1 to ZD3.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give an impact and enhance the performance effect.
More specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the second path K2 has been completed, that is, that it is time to start the right-handed operation in a display manner that is easier for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) includes a model-specific part (for example, game information unique (unique) to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, number of prize balls, jackpot probability, model name (title name) ), etc.), obstacles such as obstacle nails and windmills, movable objects for production, decorative parts, etc.),
The promotion effect executing means may display a game area image related to the game area in the promotion effect. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the game board image Z20 corresponding to the game board 2, the door frame image Z16 corresponding to the game machine frame 3 including the glass door frame, etc. in the path assembly effect and the handle assembly effect. When displaying, at least part of the model-specific part is omitted and displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the same promotion effect among a plurality of types of machine models.
Specifically, since the model-specific part is not displayed in the route assembly effect and the handle assembly effect, the same path assembly effect and handle assembly effect can be performed on game machines of different models without giving a sense of incompatibility to the player. be able to run.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
It is possible to execute a special promotion effect that encourages shooting the game medium so that the game medium flows down the first path (for example, the effect control CPU 120, based on the fact that the time saving state has ended, left-handed information executable part.),
The first component image and the second component image are not displayed in the special promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes left-handed notification (left-handed operation promotion effect) based on the end of the time saving state The part that does not execute the steering wheel assembly effect before doing (see Fig. 8-21 (F))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness.
Specifically, when the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state, a time saving state, etc.), the handle assembly effect or the route assembly effect is performed, while the state is controlled from the state advantageous to the player to the state disadvantageous. The player can be made to recognize that the game state has changed by not performing the steering wheel assembling effect or the path assembling effect when it is done.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The plurality of parts include a common part (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) through which both the game media flowing down the first path and the game media flowing down the second path can pass. ,
The promotion effect executing means can display a common part image corresponding to the common part (for example, a part image corresponding to the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. 1) in the promotion effect (modification).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to produce an effect including parts common to the first route and the second route.
Specifically, for example, like the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. can also be used for route construction production.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
After the promotion effect executing means executes the promotion effect, a second route image corresponding to the second route is displayed so that the player can recognize it, and a game medium flows down the second route image. It can be displayed (for example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the route assembly effect, a route image corresponding to the second route K2 is displayed to the player as shown in FIGS. 8-24 (G) to (J) A portion capable of executing a flow-down effect in which the path image is displayed in a recognizable manner and the game ball flows down.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, the player can be urged to perform an operation to launch a game ball onto the second path K2 assembled in the path assembly presentation.

The gaming machine of means 9 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect execution means displays the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls a plurality of images constituting the second route K2). A portion capable of executing a route assembly rendering that displays part images ZD1 to ZD4 corresponding to four parts D1 to D4 out of the parts, respectively, in an assembling manner.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start the right-handed operation by not only showing a plurality of component images but also by completing the second path K2 by assembling.

The gaming machine of means 10 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 9,
In the manufacturing process of the game machine, the first part and the second part are assembled to other parts according to a predetermined procedure,
The promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled in a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, the component image ZD1 in the route assembly effect). The assembly order of ZD4 is different from the actual assembly order in the manufacturing process, in order to make it easy for the player to understand that the second route K2 is being assembled. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, it can be presented in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 11 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 9 or 10,
In the promotion effect, the promotion effect executing means displays the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, and then causes the game medium to fire the operation component image corresponding to the shooting operation unit. (For example, after the effect control CPU 120 performs the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect, the hitting operation handle as shown in FIG. 8-22 (F) and FIG. 8-24 (L) A portion for performing right-handed notification (right-handed operation promotion effect) by displaying a handle image Z17 and a right arrow image Z18 indicating that the player 30 is rotated rightward.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.
Specifically, it is possible to provide the player with a more comprehensible indication that it is time to start the right-handed operation.

(Third Invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a third invention described below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, in a game machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-15392, etc. For example, before the operation effective period of the chance button as a predetermined member starts, a transparent button image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving the display toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two transparent images of the button overlap in the center, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button has started. There were things to do. The game machine described in the above patent publication has the problem that it is not possible to further improve the amusement. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The game machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Provided with a predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32 etc.),
The predetermined member is a plurality of parts (for example, parts A1 to A5) including a first part (for example, part A1), a second part (for example, part A5), and a third part (for example, part A2) configured,
When the predetermined member becomes usable, it is possible to display a predetermined member image related to the predetermined member (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image shown in FIG. 8-19 (A) or FIG. As shown in (B), when the operation valid period starts, the part that performs the operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3.),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component are displayed, and a third component image related to the third component is displayed. is not displayed (for example, the production control CPU 120, in the controller assembly production, for the part image ZA2 corresponding to the part A2 (back base 604), the wiring C and connector CN that the actual back base 604 has, the controller sensor unit 35A and A part where display of component images corresponding to electronic components such as the push sensor 35B is omitted (not displayed).)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the predetermined member, thereby enhancing interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the first component and the second component from being spoiled by the third component.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, gripping members 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the actions of the player,
Equipped with a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that encourages the action of the player (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
The promotion effect executing means is capable of displaying the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display five parts among a plurality of parts in the controller assembly effect). A part that displays parts images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the promotion production.
By performing the controller assembly effect, it is possible to make the player fully aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated before the effective period of operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is started. The player can operate without panicking when the start timing of the operation valid period comes.
In addition, in the controller assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed individually and the completed image is not displayed, so that the start timing of the operation effective period is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined member (for example, movable body 32) is operable,
When the first component image and the second component image are displayed, the predetermined member can be operated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). A parts image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and a parts image ZE1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. Next, FIG. As shown in 8-30(B), the controller assembly presentation and the movable body assembly presentation are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position.Modification 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be appropriately focused.
Specifically, the player's expectation of the movable body 32 moving to the performance position can be preferably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.例文帳に追加

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (eg, stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (eg, push button 31B),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting which of the first predetermined member and the second predetermined member the predetermined member image related to is to be displayed (for example, for effect control). A part in which the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggesting effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled to enable operation in the super ready-to-win effect, etc. See Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, interest is improved.
More specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of anticipation regarding which operation of the operation member will be valid before the operation valid period starts.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in a manner in which they are combined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A portion that can execute a controller assembly effect that displays component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the five components A1 to A5, respectively, in a manner in which they are assembled.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, not only is it possible to show a plurality of component images, but also by completing the assembly of the stick controller 31A, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start the valid operation period.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 5,
a first display pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled;
a second pattern that displays the first component image and the second component image in a non-assembled manner;
(For example, the production control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 and effect patterns C and D that do not display the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component image ZA5 in a manner not assembled to the component image ZA1. A part that can execute assembly effects (see Figure 8-8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation for completing the assembly by assembling all the parts.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component images used for the assembly (for example, A portion that can execute an assembly suggestive effect for displaying in a mode of collecting parts images to be assembled in the controller assembly effect, such as during a super ready-to-win effect before executing the controller assembly effect, see modified example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for completion of the assembly by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

(Fourth Invention)
In addition, the characteristic portion 063SG includes a fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, for example, in a game machine provided with a predetermined member that can be operated by a player and a display means, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-15392, etc. For example, before the operation effective period of the chance button as a predetermined member starts, a transparent button image corresponding to the chance button and having a transmittance of 50% is displayed from the left and right sides of the display means. By moving the display toward the center and displaying the button image corresponding to the chance button when the two transparent images of the button overlap in the center, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button has started. There were things to do. The game machine described in the above patent publication has the problem that it is not possible to further improve the amusement. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Provided with a predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A / push button 31B / movable body 32 etc.),
The predetermined member is composed of a plurality of parts including a first part (e.g., part A1) and a second part (e.g., part A5) more characteristic than the first part,
When the predetermined member becomes usable, it is possible to display a predetermined member image related to the predetermined member (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image shown in FIG. 8-19 (A) or FIG. As shown in (B), when the operation valid period starts, the part that performs the operation promotion notification by displaying the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3.),
before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to display a first component image related to the first component and a second component image related to the second component;
The second component image is displayed after the first component image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in order in the effect pattern B, and As shown in (E), (F), and (G), a portion displaying a part image ZA5 corresponding to a part A5 that is more characteristic than parts A1 to A4 is assembled after the part images ZA1 to ZA4. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably draw attention to the predetermined member, thereby enhancing interest.
Specifically, it is possible to inform the player that the assembly of the stick controller 31A has been completed, that is, that the start timing of the valid operation period has come, in a display mode that is easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
When displaying the second component image, it is displayed in a manner that is more visible to the player than the component images related to other components (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display the image shown in FIG. 8-18 (E). As shown, when the component image ZA5 is displayed in a manner in which it is assembled with the component image ZA1, the component image ZA5 can be displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image can be displayed around the component image ZA5, and an image display can be performed. Parts that are displayed in a manner that allows the player to more easily identify the parts than the other parts images ZA1 to ZA4, such as moving and displaying from the periphery of the display area of the device 5 toward the center.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The predetermined member (for example, stick controller 31A) is a member that constitutes a part of detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, gripping members 602L, 602R, etc.) capable of detecting the actions of the player,
Equipped with a promotion effect execution means capable of executing a promotion effect that encourages the action of the player (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B),
The promotion effect executing means is capable of displaying the first component image and the second component image in the promotion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display five parts among a plurality of parts in the controller assembly effect). A part that displays parts images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the promotion production.
Specifically, by executing the controller assembly effect before executing the operation prompting notification shown in FIGS. By making it possible for the player to be sufficiently aware of the stick controller 31A to be operated, the player can operate the stick controller 31A without panicking when the start timing of the valid operation period comes. Become.
In addition, in the controller assembly effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed in order, that is, the component images ZA1 to ZA4 are displayed individually and the completed image is not displayed, so that the start timing of the operation effective period is not reached. The player can be made aware of this fact, and by displaying an image in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA4 are assembled, the operation can be started at a suitable timing.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The predetermined member (for example, movable body 32) is operable,
When the first component image and the second component image are displayed, the predetermined member can be operated (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A). A parts image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the display device 5, and a parts image ZD1 corresponding to the movable body assembly effect is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. Next, FIG. As shown in 8-30(B), the controller assembly presentation and the movable body assembly presentation are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position.Modification 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined member is operated, the predetermined member can be appropriately focused.
Specifically, the player's expectation of the movable body 32 moving to the performance position can be preferably improved before the movement timing of the movable body 32.例文帳に追加

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The predetermined member includes a first predetermined member (eg, stick controller 31A) and a second predetermined member (eg, push button 31B),
Before displaying the predetermined member image, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting which of the first predetermined member and the second predetermined member the predetermined member image related to is to be displayed (for example, for effect control). A part in which the CPU 120 can execute an assembly suggesting effect suggesting which of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B is assembled to enable operation in the super ready-to-win effect, etc. See Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is suggested which predetermined member is displayed, interest is improved.
More specifically, it is possible to preferably improve the player's sense of anticipation regarding which operation of the operation member will be valid before the operation valid period starts.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
Before displaying the predetermined member image, the first component image and the second component image are displayed in an assembled manner (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may A part that can execute a controller assembly effect that displays part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to five parts A1 to A5 respectively in a manner of assembling.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, not only is it possible to show a plurality of component images, but also by completing the assembly of the stick controller 31A, it is possible to suitably notify the player that it is time to start the valid operation period.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 6,
a first display pattern displayed in a manner in which the first component image and the second component image are assembled;
a second pattern that displays the first component image and the second component image in a non-assembled manner;
(For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed controller image Z1 by displaying the component images ZA2 to ZA5 in a manner in which the component images ZA2 to ZA5 are assembled to the component image ZA1 in the controller assembly effect. controller assembling effects based on either one of performance patterns A and B where the component image ZA5 is displayed in a state in which the component image ZA5 is not assembled to the component image ZA1 so that the completed controller image Z1 is not displayed. (See Figure 8-9 (C))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
More specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation for completing the assembly by assembling all the parts.

The gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
Before displaying a plurality of component images including the first component image and the second component image in a manner in which they are assembled, it is possible to execute a special effect of displaying the component images used for the assembly (for example, During the super ready-to-win effect before executing the controller assembly effect, etc., a portion where it is possible to execute a parts assembly effect in which images of parts to be assembled in the controller assembly effect are displayed in a manner of collecting them, see Modified Example 2 in Fig. 8-26. )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved.
Specifically, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for completion of the assembly by the controller assembly effect before executing the controller assembly effect.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the spirit of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the operation prompting effect, the form of executing the controller assembly effect of assembling the stick controller 31A was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the controller assembly effect, , a push button assembling effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executable. Either one of the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be selected and executed, or both the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect may be started together. When one of the controller assembly effect and the push button assembly effect is selected and executed, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller assembly effect is selected at a higher rate than the push button assembly effect. is the push button 31B, it is preferable to select the push button assembly effect at a higher rate than the controller assembly effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect including the controller assembly effect is exemplified at the timing of determining the confrontation result of the battle effect in Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. , timing to notify whether or not re-variation will be executed in pseudo-continuous performance, various timings in advance notice performance that suggests the possibility of a big hit, and timing to notify whether or not to be promoted to probability variable big hit in promotion performance Or, the timing of notifying whether the round continues during the big hit, and the timing of notifying whether the game ball passes through the variable probability switch and is controlled to the probability variable state during the big hit, etc. It can be executed at any timing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation prompting effect including the controller assembly effect has two operation units, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, as operation objects, and the operation unit which is activated among the two operation units However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of three or more types of operation units other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the operation target. Alternatively, only one of the operation units may be targeted.

(Modification 1)
Further, as described above, when it is not possible to know which of the two operating units, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, to be operated is effective, for example, in the assembly effect, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B It may be possible to execute an assembly effect in which it is difficult to specify which of the buttons 31B is assembled to enable the operation. Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-25. 8-25, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an assembly effect in Modification 1 of the present characteristic portion 063SG.

In the assembly effect in the operation promotion effect as Modified Example 1 of the present characteristic portion 063SG, as shown in FIG. ) As shown in FIG. 8-25(D), the component image Z30 that is difficult to identify is displayed in a manner in which the component corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-25(D). 8-25(E) and (F), the part corresponding to the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be identified as the assembly progresses. If the operation target is the stick controller 31A, the controller image Z1 is displayed in a manner in which the final assembly is performed. abbreviated) is possible.

In addition, in the present modified example 1, as a display mode of the component image Z30 for making it difficult to specify the operation target, it is displayed in a black circle form having a character "?" ), displaying parts in silhouette (Fig. 8-25 (D), etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the part image is mosaiced or the external shape of the part is deformed. Alternatively, various display modes other than the above may be adopted, such as lowering the brightness of the image display device 5 . Furthermore, while the visibility is being lowered near the completion of assembly, the parts may be colored or stickers may be attached, and then the parts may be completed by displaying the effect image and displaying the parts in color.

(Modification 2)
In the above-described embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which a component assembly effect that suggests which operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is valid in the operation promotion effect can be executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a parts assembly effect as an assembly suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that a controller assembly effect will be executed. Modification 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-26. 8-26, (A) to (E) are diagrams showing the super ready-to-win effect in Modified Example 2 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

As shown in FIGS. 8-26 (A) to (E), for example, during the Super Reach effect before executing the controller assembly effect, parts displayed in a manner in which images of the parts to be assembled in the controller assembly effect are collected. It may also be possible to execute collective performance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), a part image Z31 corresponding to each of a plurality of parts constituting an operation target to be assembled in the assembly presentation is displayed so that it is difficult to identify which part it is. Displayed in a form (for example, displayed in a form with a character "?" is displayed (fade-in display) in a manner that changes to an identifiable manner, the operation object to be assembled in the assembly presentation becomes clear step by step, so that the player's interest can be attracted.

The timing for changing the component image Z31 to an identifiable mode may be a predetermined timing, a timing linked to the chance-up effect in the super ready-to-win effect, or a Various timings such as the timing at which a specific mode of operation (for example, a long press for a predetermined period of time, a predetermined number of button operations, etc.) is performed during a specific period in which the promotion effect for prompting the operation is not executed may be used. .

In addition, in the assembly suggestion presentation, as shown in FIG. 8-26(D), finally all the component images Z31 may be displayed so as to be identifiable, or as shown in FIG. 8-26(E) , finally, only a part of the component image Z31 may be displayed so as to be identifiable. When all the part images Z31 are finally displayed so as to be identifiable, the effect patterns A and B for completing the assembly are likely to be executed in the controller assembly effect, and finally only part of the part images Z31 are displayed so as to be identifiable. If it is done, the effect patterns C and D in which the assembly is not completed in the controller assembly effect can be easily executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a promotion effect that encourages the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in other effects (for example, a look-ahead effect or advance notice effect related to the pending memory display) during the execution period of the assembly suggestion effect. may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity due to the promotion performance of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B which are not assembled during the execution period of the assembly suggestion performance.

In addition, it is possible to execute the assembly suggestion presentation in a state in which it is not known which of the plurality of operation sections will be effective as an operation target, and at least two of the plurality of operation sections are unique parts. and common parts common to each, it is preferable to display the common parts before the unique parts in the assembly suggestion presentation. By doing so, it is not possible to predict which operation unit will be effective just by displaying the common component, so the interest of the player can be maintained.

Further, such an assembly suggestion effect may be executed separately from the parts assembly effect described in the above embodiment, or may be executed as an assembly suggestion effect that also serves as a parts assembly effect. may also serve as an assembly suggestion effect.

(Modification 3)
In the above-described embodiment, in the handle assembling effect, the form in which the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball-hitting operation handle 30 are displayed in an assembling mode was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Before performing the notification of hitting to the right in the operation prompting effect A, the parts images ZB1 to ZB4 constituting the ball hitting operation handle 30 may be displayed in a non-assembled manner. Modification 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-27. 8-27, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the steering wheel assembly effect in Modified Example 3 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the handle assembly effect, the part images ZB1 to ZB4 that make up the ball-hitting operation handle 30 are displayed in a mode in which the door frame image Z16 is assembled. Then, the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed in an enlarged manner, and as shown in FIG. As shown in 8-27(F), it is also possible to notify the player of hitting to the right.

The manner in which the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are sequentially displayed can be variously changed. , display in a manner that appears from the periphery of the display area and gathers in the center, or display in a manner that gradually changes from a difficult-to-identify manner to an identifiable manner (fade-in display) is also possible.

(Modification 4)
In the above-described embodiment, in the path assembly presentation, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 are displayed in a manner that they are assembled to the game board image Z20, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it is also possible to display the part images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 in a non-assembled manner before the right shot notification in the shooting operation promotion effect B is performed. Modification 4 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIG. 8-28. 8-28, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the route construction effect in the modification 4 of the characteristic part 063SG.

In the path assembling effect, the component images ZD1 to ZD4 that make up the second path K2 are displayed in a mode in which they are assembled to the game board image Z20. As shown in FIG. 8-28(F), after displaying the respective part images ZD1 to ZD4 one by one in an enlarged display mode, the notification of hitting to the right may be performed as shown in FIG. 8-28(F). Also, when displaying in the enlarged mode, an effect image Z35 for highlighting the component images may be displayed around the component images ZD1 to ZD4.

The order in which the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are displayed in an enlarged manner may be the order in which the game ball passes when hit to the right. The player can be made to recognize the flow of the game ball flowing down the second path K2 without performing the flowing effect described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the firing operation promotion effect A in which the handle assembly effect is executed at the start of the big win is executed, and the firing operation promotion effect in which the path assembly effect is executed at the end of the big win (at the start of the time saving state) Although the form in which the performance B is executed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, the shooting operation promoting performance B is executed at the start of the big win, and the shot is fired at the end of the big win (at the start of the time saving state). An operation prompting effect A may be executed. Also, either the shooting operation promoting effect A or the shooting operation promoting effect B may be executed at both the start and end of the big win.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after executing the route assembly effect in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if at least the route construction effect is executed, the downstream effect may be omitted. Further, when the shooting operation promotion effect B is executed at the start of the big win, in the flowing effect, as shown in FIG. , an image in which the game ball finally wins the special variable winning ball device 7 may be displayed. Furthermore, after executing the handle assembly effect in FIGS.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the path assembly effect shown in FIGS. 8-23 (A) to (E) of the firing operation promotion effect B, each component image ZD1 to ZD4 is displayed in a mode of assembling to the game board image Z20. After that, the game board image Z20 (complete image) finally assembled with all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 is not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the final A game board image Z20 (completed image) in which all the component images ZD1 to ZD4 are assembled may be displayed. That is, in the steering wheel assembly effect, an unfinished image may be displayed without displaying the completed image ZB5 in which all the component images ZB1 to ZB4 are finally assembled. As described above, in each assembly rendering, the completed image of the predetermined member does not necessarily have to be displayed as long as the third component image using at least two component images is displayed.

(Modification 5)
In the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, and the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, the component images constituting the operation unit as the detection means for detecting the player's motion are assembled. Although the embodiment has been exemplified as a display mode, the present invention is not limited to this. When executing the movable body effect to move toward the movable body 32 (predetermined member), it may be possible to execute the movable body assembly effect to display the image of the parts constituting the movable body 32 (predetermined member) in a specific mode (for example, an assembly mode). .

Modification 5 of the characteristic portion 063SG will now be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. 8-29, (A) is a diagram showing the operation mode of the movable body, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the movable body. 8-30 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as the fifth modification. 8-31 (D) to (G) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as the fifth modification.

As shown in FIG. 8-29(A), the movable body 32 is positioned between the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 and the effect position positioned substantially in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the movable body 32 is assembled to a base member 501 and a front side of the base member 501, and an LED having a plurality of LEDs (light emitting diodes) arranged on the front side. It is mainly composed of a substrate 502, a base frame 503, and lens members 504A to 504C capable of transmitting light from the LEDs. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the base member 501 will be referred to as component E1, the LED substrate 502 as component E2, the base frame 503 as component E3, and the lens members 504A to 504C as component E4.

In this modification 5, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button as shown in FIGS. 31B is executed, and the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is input within the operation valid period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B whose operation is validated. , that is, when an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected, or when an operation effective period has passed without input of a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. When the display result is a big hit, the result of the battle performance is notified, and the movable body performance of dropping the movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position is executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 starts the movable body assembly effect together when executing the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), the part image ZA1 corresponding to the controller assembly effect is displayed on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movable part image ZA1 is displayed on the right side of the display area of the image display device 5. A part image ZE1 (part images ZE2 to ZE4) corresponding to the body assembly effect is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are progressed together, and the movable body 32 is moved up and down in the vicinity of the origin position. In addition, the built-in LED may be caused to emit light according to the vertical movement.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-30(C), the effect control CPU 120 completes the assembly of the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect before completing the assembly of the movable body 32 in the movable body assembly effect. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-31(D), the controller image Z1 is displayed to notify the operator of the need to operate the stick controller 31A, while the assembly of the movable body 32 is completed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E), at the timing when the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A is input during the operation effective period, or at the timing when the operation effective period has passed without inputting the detection signal, the variable When the display result is a big hit, the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z40 is displayed around the movable body 32 in the display area of the image display device 5 so that the friend character becomes the enemy character. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a loss, the movable body 32 is not dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

It should be noted that the assembly of the movable body 32 may not be completed in the movable body assembly presentation, regardless of whether the variable display result is a big win. Also, the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect may complete or fail in assembly at the same timing, or the controller assembly effect may complete or fail in assembly earlier than the movable body assembly effect.

In the fifth modification, the effect control CPU 120 exemplified a mode in which the controller assembly effect and the movable body assembly effect are executed at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect may be executable separately from the controller assembly effect (operation promotion effect). Furthermore, in Modified Example 5, an embodiment in which the operable movable body 32 is applied as an example of the predetermined member is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined member may be an inoperable decorative member or the like. Other members may be used, and game members and structures related to games such as winning opening forming members and passage forming members such as the special variable winning ball device 7 and the variable winning ball device 6B may also be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the firing operation promotion effect A is executed at the start of the big win game state, and the firing operation promotion effect B is executed at the end of the big win game state (at the start of the time saving state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, the shooting operation promotion performance B is executed at the start of the big win game state, and the shooting operation promotion performance A is executed at the end of the big win game state (at the start of the time saving state). You may Further, either the shooting operation promoting effect A or the shooting operation promoting effect B may be executed at the start and end of the big win game state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications, in the controller assembly presentation in the operation promotion presentation, the handle assembly presentation and path assembly presentation in the firing operation promotion presentation, and the movable body assembly presentation, the parts images constituting the predetermined members are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the component images constituting the predetermined component are displayed in a specific mode, the first component can be displayed as the second component as described above. In addition to being displayed in the form of being assembled to a part, the wiring may be displayed in the form of connector connection so that it is possible to identify that signals are flowing through the wiring after connection.

In other words, the mode of assembling parts includes not only the assembling of parts but also the mode of connecting parts (wiring), coloring, processing, or molding the parts. Further, as in Modifications 3 and 4, each part image is displayed in a sequentially enlarged (or reduced) mode, each part image is displayed in a sequentially emphasized mode, or a mode in which each part image is arranged on a predetermined member. It is possible to display in various modes other than the above-described assembly mode, such as displaying by . In other words, the parts include all components that make up the predetermined member, such as electronic parts such as solenoids, motors, sensors, and LEDs, wiring, screws, and the like.

Further, the part image is not limited to an image simulating a part constituting a predetermined member (such as an image displayed in a manner in which the player can identify the part), and is related to the part constituting the predetermined member. If it is an image that does, for example, it is possible to identify the parts with a minimum of elements such as outlines, but by omitting, whitening, blurring, transforming, deforming, etc. It also includes images, etc., in which parts are displayed in a manner that makes it difficult for a person to identify them.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly presentation in the operation promotion presentation, the handle assembly presentation and path assembly presentation in the firing operation promotion presentation, and the movable body assembly presentation, the appearance of electronic parts such as wiring, connectors, sensors, and solenoids is poor. Although a form in which parts are not displayed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and these electronic parts or parts that look unattractive may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, each part image corresponding to each part is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint position. While displaying in a form (perspective view) and assembling by moving each component image straight at a predetermined speed toward a predetermined component image, the present invention is not limited to this. The component images may be displayed in forms viewed from different viewpoint positions (for example, front view, side view, rear view, plan view, bottom view, etc.). In addition, the component image may be displayed in rotation, may be moved while being displayed in a reduced/enlarged manner, or may be moved in a non-linear manner. Also, the moving speed can be changed variously.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect, the handle assembly effect and path assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect, and the movable body assembly effect, each part image corresponding to each part is assembled one by one. , the present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed in a manner in which a plurality of parts are assembled together.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect, and in the handle assembly effect and the path assembly effect in the firing operation promoting effect, a plurality of parts constituting the operation unit capable of detecting the player's motion are assembled. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to stick controller 31A, push button 31B, ball hitting operation handle 30 and movable body 32, speakers 8L and 8R, various decorative parts, image display device 5, various winning hole forming members, variable winning ball device, game area Y , the game board 2, and the pachinko game machine 1 (including the glass door frame and the game machine frame 3)} may be displayed in a specific manner.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect in the operation promotion effect is started at a predetermined timing before the timing at which the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed, and the handle assembly effect in the firing operation promotion effect is started. Although the route assembly effect is exemplified as being started at a predetermined timing before the timing at which the steering wheel image Z17 is displayed, for example, the controller assembly effect may be started during the battle effect, and the steering wheel assembly effect may be started during the battle effect. The effect and route assembly effect may be started at the start timing of the fanfare period or the ending period. That is, the start timing is arbitrary.

In the above-described embodiment, the controller assembly effect, the steering wheel assembly effect, and the route assembly effect have been exemplified by displaying a mode in which all the component images are continuously assembled within a predetermined period, but the present invention is similar to this. For example, the display of a mode in which one component image is combined with another component image (for example, cut-in display, etc.) may be divided into multiple times and performed stepwise. For example, the controller assembling effect (stepwise effect) may be divided into a plurality of times and may be displayed step by step from the start of the variable display in which one part image is assembled to another part image. Furthermore, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the reserved memory can be executed, one component image is combined with another component image in multiple variable displays before the variable display that executes the operation promotion effect in the super reach effect. The display of the attachment mode may be performed step by step, and the completion of assembly may be displayed in the variable display for executing the operation prompting effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when displaying the mode of assembling the part images during execution of the controller assembling effect, the steering wheel assembling effect, and the route assembling effect, the background image of the part image, the effect image, etc. are displayed, It is possible to output an effect sound or the like, and the degree of expectation for a big hit may be made different by changing the display mode of the background image or the effect image or the mode of the effect sound.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the controller assembling effect, the steering wheel assembling effect, and the path assembling effect, the mode of displaying the assembling mode by moving and displaying (moving image display) each part image was exemplified. is not limited to this, and may be displayed in such a manner that each part image is assembled by a ally character or an enemy character appearing in a super ready-to-win effect, for example. In this case, the type of character (for example, whether the character to be assembled is a friendly character or an enemy character), the character's mode (for example, the color of the character's clothes, facial expression, body shape, possession, etc.) The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different depending on items such as items that are available.

In addition, in the controller assembly rendering in the above embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 were displayed one by one in order to be assembled. From the state in which all of to ZA5 are displayed, they may be displayed in such a manner that they are assembled one by one or in plurals.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, each part image related to a plurality of parts including the first part and the second part constituting the stick controller 31A in the controller assembly effect and the ball hitting operation handle 30 in the handle assembly effect is assembled. is displayed, and then completed images ZA6 and ZB5 in which the assembly is completed are displayed as specific component images using at least a part of the first component image and the second component image. The specific part image using at least a part of the first part image and the second part image is not necessarily limited to the completed image in which the assembly is completed by assembling all the part images. Alternatively, an unfinished image ZA7 or an image using at least a part of the game board image Z20 and the component image ZD1 in the path assembly effect (for example, an image in which the component image ZD1 is combined with the game board image Z20. FIG. 8-23 (B)), it may be an incomplete image in which the first component image and the second component image corresponding to at least two of the plurality of components are combined.

In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the completed image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A as shown in FIG. 8-17(F) in the controller assembly effect, and then 2 shows an example in which the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. After displaying the complete image ZA6 of the stick controller 31A, may be displayed in the form of being attached to the gaming machine frame 3, and then the controller image Z1 may be displayed. Further, the completed image ZA6 and the controller image Z1 may or may not be the same image.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following fifth invention. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, for example, the motion of a player is detected. Equipped with a push button and an operation lever as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect prompting the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the effective period of operation of the push button or the operation lever. was able to execute In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, when one of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect image corresponding to the activated detection means is displayed, and the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that interest cannot be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a step effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a step effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes in stages) starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect. 8-14 to 8-14, in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. Figure 8-16) and
with
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 of "Close!" or, as shown in FIG.
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the step effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode (for example, the collective success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect at a higher rate than when the parts collecting effect of failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. (See Figure 8-10)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode and the expectation for the promotion effect to be executed in the second mode can be increased step by step, the interest in the game is improved. do.
Specifically, when the operation of either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B becomes effective, not only is the controller image Z1 or the push button image Z3 displayed and the operation promotion effect is started, but also the operation promotion effect is started. Execution of the part assembly performance before the operation prompting performance can suggest to the player the possibility of displaying the controller image Z1 with a high possibility of winning a big win in the operation promoting performance. It is possible to preferably increase the player's expectation for the display of the controller image Z1.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The step effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the step effect is a effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The step effect executing means can display a plurality of special effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed (for example, Each part image ZA1-ZA5, ZC1-ZC5 is a black silhouette having a different outer shape and surface mode from the parts A1-A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1-C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. (See Fig. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second mode.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The step effect execution means displays a special effect image when the advantageous state is obtained, at a higher rate than when the advantageous state is not obtained, while a plurality of special effect images are being displayed step by step in the step effect. Change the mode (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle is switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. Modified example of FIG. 8-33 7)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the change in the display mode of the special effect images while the number of display of the special effect images increases.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
After displaying the special effect image in a manner in which it is difficult to identify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed in the step effect, the stage effect execution means displays the Displaying in a manner in which it is possible to identify which of the promotion effect of the first mode and the promotion effect of the second mode is to be executed (for example, in the parts assembly effect, the parts image ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a silhouette mode, that is, in a difficult-to-identify mode in which it is difficult for the player to identify which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, in an identifiable manner that allows the player to identify which part image is the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. 8-11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the step performance which of the first mode promotion performance and the second mode promotion performance will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the second mode promotion performance. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the promotion effect in the first mode when the special effect image does not change to the special display mode in the staged effect (for example, as an operation target of the operation promotion effect) When the push button 31B is determined, the ratio of production patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 that fail to gather is higher than production patterns PT1-2, 1-3 and PT2-2, 2-3 that succeed in gathering. 8-, when the part assembly effect based on the effect pattern PT1-1 or PT2-1 that fails to be assembled is executed, there is a high possibility that the push button image Z3 will be displayed in the operation promotion effect. 10 (B) reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the promotion effect not being executed.

(Sixth invention)
As described above, the characteristic portion 063SG includes the following sixth invention. That is, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, for example, in a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57252, for example, the motion of a player is detected. Equipped with a push button and an operation lever as a plurality of possible detection means, and a promotion effect prompting the player to operate by displaying an effect image corresponding to the push button or the operation lever during the effective period of operation of the push button or the operation lever. was able to execute In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, when one of the push button and the operation lever is activated, the effect image corresponding to the activated detection means is displayed, and the effect is monotonous. Therefore, there is a problem that interest cannot be improved. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can improve interest,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Staged effect execution means capable of executing a stepped effect of displaying a special effect image in stages before the promotion effect is executed (for example, before the effect control CPU 120 starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect) 8-14 to 8-, a portion where part assembly effects can be executed in which part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. 16) and
with
The promotion performance executing means executes the promotion performance in a plurality of types of modes including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of becoming the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion performance of the first mode is executed. (For example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A and the characters "Close!" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-19(B), or a portion that displays a push button image Z3 imitating the push button 31B and a character image Z4 reading "Press!" on the image display device 5),
The stepwise effect execution means is a step in which it is possible to specify which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed after the special effect image is displayed in stages. Effect can be executed (for example, in the first stage to the third stage in the part assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are in the silhouette mode, that is, the player uses either the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). In the fourth stage, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in a clear manner, that is, when the player uses the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is displayed in an identifiable manner that allows identification of which part image it is (see Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not known until the middle of the step performance which of the first mode promotion performance and the second mode promotion performance will be executed, there is a sense of expectation for the execution of the second mode promotion performance. can be increased step by step, the amusement of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The step effect executing means is configured to generate effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5 or component images ZC1 to It is characterized by being able to display ZC5).
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the step effect is a effect executed in relation to the promotion effect.
More specifically, the effect images related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are part images ZA1 to ZA5 or part images ZC1 to ZC5 that form part of the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3. are displayed in order, the player's sense of anticipation for gathering all the part images can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The step effect execution means can display a plurality of special effect images in a manner in which it is difficult to specify which of the first mode of the promotion effect and the second mode of the promotion effect is to be executed (for example, each The part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are black silhouettes different in external shape and surface mode from the parts A1 to A5 of the stick controller 31A or the parts C1 to C5 of the push button 31B in the first stage and the second stage. ?” is displayed in a common silhouette form in which white characters are displayed (see Fig. 8-11).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably increase the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the promotion effect of the second mode.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The promotion effect execution means is configured to perform a specific promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that is executed in accordance with the staged effect, and a predetermined promotion effect that is executed independently of the stage effect (for example, is executed in relation to a dialog announcement). operation promotion effects, etc.) and can be executed,
In the predetermined promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a manner different from the specific promotion effect (for example, the controller image Z1 of the operation promotion effect executed in relation to the dialogue notice is executed in relation to the parts assembly effect). 8-32.Modification 6)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent confusion between the specific promotion effect and the predetermined promotion effect due to the difference in mode while preventing the decrease in interest caused by not executing the predetermined promotion effect during execution of the stage effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The step effect executing means displays the special effect image based on one of a plurality of display patterns with different rates of the advantageous state (for example, effect patterns PT1-1, PT1-2, PT1-3 , PT2-1, PT2-2, and PT2-3, the execution ratio is set so that the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot increases in the order (see FIG. 8-10 (A)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the types of effects can be diversified, and the player can expect whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved depending on the type of the display pattern, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the display pattern.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The promotion effect executing means can execute the promotion effect in the first mode or the second mode using a special effect image different from the special effect image (for example, an operation promotion effect used for the operation promotion effect). A part that may be able to execute a staged effect using a special effect image (for example, a character image, etc.) that is not related to the image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the appearance of the special effect image can give unexpectedness.

(Modification 6)
Next, Modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-32. FIGS. 8-32 (A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation prompting effect as a modification 6 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, after executing the component gathering effect in Super Reach, as shown in FIGS. The controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are displayed when executing the operation prompting effect for promoting the operation. 8-19A and 8-19(V), the controller in a mode different from the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 shown in FIGS. It is preferable to display an image Z63, a push button image (not shown), or the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-32(A), when the action of the player is detected while the parts gathering effect is being executed in the super ready-to-win effect, the ally character wins the battle effect and wins the jackpot. If it is possible to execute a dialogue announcement as a notification effect in which a dialogue suggesting the possibility is displayed, as shown in FIG. 31B), a controller image Z63 (or a push button image) can be displayed. Then, when an operation of the stick controller 31A (or the push button 31B) is detected during the operation valid period, a character image Z61 and a dialogue image Z62 are displayed.

This controller image ZA1 has a display mode in which an effect image Z60 simulating a flame is not displayed around the stick controller 31A, like the controller image Z1 in the assembly effect. In this way, the controller image ZA1 for the operation-promoting effect to be executed in relation to the dialogue notice is different in display mode from the controller image Z1 for the operation-promoting effect to be executed in relation to the part-collecting effect, so that the parts-collecting effect is displayed. It is possible to execute other promotion effects during the production, and it becomes easy to understand that the advance notice effects are different from the operation promotion effects executed in relation to the parts assembly production, so that the player can easily understand that the parts production production is different from the operation promotion production. It becomes easy to understand which of the effects is the operation promoting effect executed in relation to.

(Modification 7)
Next, Modification 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-33. FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (E) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of a part assembly presentation as a modification example 7 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above-described embodiment, one of the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 corresponding to the push button 31B is used for the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT2-3 of the part assembly effect. Although they are displayed in order, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the type of image displayed in the middle may be switched (changed) from the component images ZC1 to ZC5 to the component images ZA1 to ZA5. .

For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) to (C), up to the second part images ZC1 and ZC2 corresponding to the push button 31B are displayed, but when displaying the third and subsequent part images, , the part images ZA3 to ZA5 corresponding to the stick controller 31A may be displayed in the third and subsequent stages. In other words, in this case, the performance patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3 corresponding to the push button 31B are changed to the performance patterns PT2-1 to PT2-3 corresponding to the stick controller 31A, thereby increasing the reliability of the big win. It is

(Modification 8)
Next, Modification 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG will be described with reference to FIG. 8-34. 8-34, (A) to (B) are explanatory diagrams showing an operation example of an operation prompting effect as Modified Example 8 of the characteristic portion 063SG.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-19(A) or FIG. 8-19(B), in the operation prompting effect, a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A or a push button image imitating the push button 31B is displayed. When the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected while Z3 is being displayed, if the result of the variable display is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (E) and (F) For example, when the controller image Z1 of the stick controller 31A is displayed, the notification of the failure is notified when the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player is detected. As shown in 8-34(B), an effect image in which the stick controller 31A is disassembled (destroyed) may be displayed.

By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display result is a failure due to the operation of the stick controller 31A. In addition, especially when the controller image Z1 is displayed after completion of the assembly in the controller assembly effect, the player can be notified that the assembly has failed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the form in which the jackpot game state is applied is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected value of the game media that can be obtained. There are multiple types of specific game states (jackpots with different numbers of rounds, etc.), high-base states (time-saving states) that make it easier to fulfill the conditions for paying out prize balls than normal game states, and the probability of being in the specific game state. High probability game state (high probability state), high probability low base state (latency probability variable state), special reach state (for example, super reach etc.), state that the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the big hit variation pattern etc. be

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, the hitting operation handle 30 including the handle sensor, etc. are applied as detection means capable of detecting the action of the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Also included are video cameras, sensors, etc. that can be detected by digitally recording predetermined actions of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A including the controller sensor unit 35A as the detection means, the push button 31B including the push sensor 35B, and the hitting operation handle 30 including the handle sensor are detectable motions (for example, pulling forward). A controller image Z1 simulating the stick controller 31A and a push button image simulating the push button 31B in the operation promotion performance and the shooting operation promotion performance as promotion performances for prompting the player to perform an action, pushing operation, rotation operation, etc.). Z3, a handle image Z17 imitating the ball-hitting operation handle 30, a right arrow image Z18, etc. are displayed, and character images such as "Pull!", "Push!", and "Right hit!" The present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to prompting operations by displaying effect images as described above, light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided on the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, ball hitting operation handle 30, etc. ) to prompt an operation (action), output voice messages indicating operation modes such as “Pull!”, “Press!”, and “Right-handed!” An operation (action) may be prompted by a display device other than 5, or the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation prompting effect, an example was exemplified in which the operation of either one of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, that is, the two operation units (detection means) is promoted. The present invention is not limited to this, and may encourage the operation of both the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Further, it may be provided with three or more operation units (detection means), and prompt the operation of at least one operation unit (detection means) among the three or more operation units (detection means).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are applied as detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the detection means that may be the operation target of the operation promotion effect are only two or more detection means that have different operation (operation) modes of the player, such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, two or more detection means (for example, two or more buttons, etc.) provided individually even if the player's action mode is the same, or a first operation reception mode and a second operation reception mode that is different from the first operation reception mode. The operation target may also be a detection means that can change its reception mode (for example, a button whose operation reception mode can be changed between a normal operation reception mode and a projecting reception mode that protrudes from normal).

In other words, the effect control CPU 120 performs a plurality of types of promotion effects including a first mode and a second mode in which the ratio (reliability) of winning a big hit is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. may be executable, and in this case, at least two of the three or more aspects of the promotion effect (for example, the promotion effect by the normal operation acceptance mode and the promotion effect by the protruding acceptance mode) may be executed. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a staged effect executed before the promotion effect is executed, an operation promotion effect is executed to prompt the player to perform an action that can be detected by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the component set effect is executed before the ball is hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the handle image Z17 indicating that the hitting operation handle 30 is rotated to the right or the right By displaying the arrow image Z18, it may be possible to execute a staged effect corresponding to a right-handed operation promotion effect or the like in which a right-handed shot is notified.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is displayed in the specific display area Z51 as a special effect image related to the operation promotion effect in which the display mode is displayed so as to change step by step in the part assembly effect, and is displayed in the operation promotion effect. Although the form in which the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 that make up the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 are applied has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect image is used as an operation promotion effect. As long as it is a related effect image, it may not be a part image that constitutes at least a part of the effect image displayed in the operation promotion effect. An effect image having the same display mode as Z1 or push button image Z3), a effect image having a similar display mode, or an effect image having a different display mode may be used.

In other words, the special effect image that is displayed step by step in the staged effect is an image (for example, a part image), not only related effect images (for example, component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5, etc.) related to the operation promoting effect image, but also separate effect images not related to the operation promoting effect, that is, used for the operation promoting effect It may be a special effect image (for example, a character image) unrelated to the operation promotion effect image.

Furthermore, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as special effect images are component images that constitute a part of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B that are to be operated in the operation promoting effect. Although the effect image is used to make it easy to identify the push button 31B, even if the image constitutes a part of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, it is difficult to identify it as a part image (for example, a fragment image). image). Also, the special effect image may be a silhouette image, an icon image, or a photograph image of the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part gathering effect as a stepped effect, a form in which a plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed stepwise (in order) and arranged in the specific display area Z51 was exemplified. , The present invention is not limited to this. When the stage effect can be executed, after the component images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed side by side in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly effect as in the above-described embodiment, the displayed component image ZA1 is displayed. A partial image constituting a part of the push button image Z3 and the steering wheel image Z17 is assembled so as to assemble the push button image Z3 and the steering wheel image Z17 before the promotion rendering is executed so as to execute the controller assembly rendering for assembling ZA5. Alternatively, the right arrow image Z18 may be formed by collecting partial images forming part of the right arrow image Z18.

That is, in the staged effect, after the special effect image is displayed in stages, the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the push button image Z3 is displayed). If it becomes possible to specify (the player can predict) which one will be executed (the player can predict), as in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of special effect images displayed in stages are used to finally A plurality of special effect images may be displayed in order without displaying the operation promoting effect image at the time, or the display mode of one special effect image may be changed step by step so that the operation promoting effect image can be specified. (For example, the display mode of the controller image Z1 may be changed step by step like the component images ZA1 to ZA5).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component gathering effect as the step effect, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the fourth stage, and the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed and the push button image Z3 are displayed. Although the form in which it is possible to specify which of the operation prompting effects to be executed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and finally the first mode of the promoting effect (controller image If it becomes possible to specify which one of the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the push button image Z3 is displayed) is to be executed, the special effect image (each The component images ZA1 to ZA5, ZC1 to ZC5) may not be displayed in a manner that allows identification of which of the first mode promotion effect and the second mode promotion effect is to be executed. That is, after changing each of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 to the third stage, an effect image ( For example, a character image such as "Get the controller!") is displayed separately from the special effect image, or a voice that can specify whether the first mode promotion effect or the second mode promotion effect is to be executed. (For example, "CONTROLLER GET!") may be output.

Further, the stepwise change in the display mode of the special effect image in the staged effect means that in the part assembly effect, the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 associated with the stick controller 31A change from the silhouette mode to the icon mode, Not only does the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 sequentially increase, that is, the special effect image is displayed step by step, the display mode of the specific display area Z51 changes, For example, with the passage of time, the display mode of the special effect image such as color, shape, contrast, and brightness may change, or characters, symbols, numbers, etc. may be updated or additionally displayed, levels, etc. Including those in which the display is increased or decreased, and in which the special effect image changes from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see.

In addition, displaying the special effect images step by step in the step effect means that in the part assembly effect, the display mode of one or more of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 changes from the first step to the fourth step. In addition to displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, the number of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed in the specific display area Z51 is increased or decreased by sequentially displaying the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 by a predetermined number. and display such that a predetermined operation prompting effect image is constructed using the component images ZA1 to ZA5, like the controller assembly effect.

Also, the special effect image may be, for example, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 themselves, or may be an image including the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and their surrounding background areas. Further, the stepwise change may be part or all of the display mode of the special effect image.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the special display mode of the special effect image in the part assembly effect (stage effect), the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 or all of the component images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the specific display area Z51. Although the form in which the display mode of gathering success is applied has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special display mode can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is a predetermined display mode. Even if all of the plurality of component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 do not gather in the display area Z51, a predetermined special effect image (for example, the component image ZA5 or the component image ZC5) may be displayed. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step one by one in the specific display area Z51. Two or more images out of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed together, or all the component images ZA1 to ZA5 may be displayed together like the assembly suggestive presentation of the second modification. , ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in the first stage display manner, then the display manners of some or all of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 may be changed in stages.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the form in which either the part images ZA1 to ZA5 or the part images ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed step by step in the specific display area Z51 was exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 may be displayed in a mixed state. Execution of an operation prompting effect by the corresponding operation unit may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the display mode of each part image changes in four stages (see FIGS. 8 to 11) in the part assembly presentation, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be changed in at least two steps, and may be changed in five steps or more.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the display mode of each part image changes from the first stage to the fourth stage in the part assembly effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Any one or more of the component images may have an effect pattern in which display is started from the second stage or higher.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect, the display mode of each part image is exemplified as a form in which the display mode changes from the first stage to the fourth stage at a predetermined timing during the ready-to-win effect. is not limited to this, and the display mode may be changed at the timing when the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the component assembly presentation, each component image is selected from the component images ZA1 to ZA5 related to the controller image Z1 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 related to the push button image Z3 in the first to third stages. is displayed in a difficult-to-identify (difficult-to-identify) manner, and in the fourth stage, it is displayed in an identifiable (identifiable) manner to indicate which of the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and the component images ZC1 to ZC5. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least in the first stage, the promotion effect of the first mode (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the promotion effect of the second mode (push If it is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to identify (difficult to identify) which one is to be executed, it can be identified in the second and third stages. It may be displayed in a (identifiable) form. Moreover, the number of steps for displaying in a difficult-to-identify manner and the number of steps for displaying in an identifiable manner should be at least one each, and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the first stage and the second stage of the part assembly rendering, the form using the silhouette mode commonly used for the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and the part images ZC1 to ZC5 was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the component images ZA1 to ZA5 in the first and second stages and the component images ZC1 to ZC5 in the first and second stages are displayed in different display modes. You may make it For example, in the first step or the second step, one of a plurality of silhouette images having different display modes may be displayed.

In addition, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 as the special effect images are the first mode promotion effect (the operation promotion effect in which the controller image Z1 is displayed) and the second mode promotion effect (the push button image Z3 is displayed). The aspect in which it is difficult to identify which one is to be executed is, for example, the shape of the part image is deformed like the silhouette aspect, the surface aspect is not shown, The player may use special effects such as omitting, whitening, blurring, deforming, etc., or making the special effect image difficult for the player to see (for example, making it difficult to see by increasing or decreasing the brightness). This includes images that display effect images in a manner that makes it difficult to identify them.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when it is decided to display the controller image Z1 simulating the stick controller 31A in the operation promotion effect, the controller image Z1 is displayed before the controller image Z1 is displayed at the start of the operation effective period of the stick controller 31A. , the present invention is not limited to this. , the controller assembly effect may not be executed. In addition, even when all the part images ZA1 to ZA5 corresponding to the controller image Z1 are displayed in the part assembly effect (when the assembly is successful), the operation effective period of the stick controller 31A is started without executing the controller assembly effect. The controller image Z1 may be displayed along with .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the controller image Z1 may be displayed in the operation promotion effect even when the effect based on the effect patterns PT1-1 and PT2-1 of the assembly failure is executed in the component assembly effect. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect based on the production failure pattern PT1-1, PT2-1 of gathering failure is executed, the controller image Z1 is displayed in the operation promotion effect. You may choose not to do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly presentation, even when the presentation based on the assembly success presentation pattern PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, 2-3 is executed, the push button is pressed in the operation promotion presentation. Although the form in which the image Z3 is displayed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects based on the production patterns PT1-2, 1-3, PT2-2, PT2-2, PT2-3 of successful assembly are shown. is executed, the push button image Z3 may not be displayed in the operation prompting effect.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which the controller assembly effect can be executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the push button assembly effect for assembling the push button 31B may be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect pattern type is determined in the part set effect pattern determination process, the execution ratio is set to be different between the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the operation target in the operation promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the performance patterns may be determined at a different rate depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a loss. However, one of the performance patterns may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the controller assembly performance is executed in the operation prompting performance.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the parts gathering effect as a staged effect is executed during the battle effect period in Super Reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion notification is started. The execution period of the parts set effect is arbitrary as long as it is before the event, for example, other than the execution period of the super reach battle effect (for example, the period from the start of the variable display to the time before it develops into super reach) good too. Specifically, by temporarily stopping the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is simulated as multiple variable displays. In the case of executing the operation prompting effect according to the time, the staged effect may be executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern. Alternatively, it may be the execution period of the variable display before the variable display in which the part assembly effect is executed as the pre-reading preview effect. Furthermore, the parts assembly effect may be executed multiple times during the execution period of one variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the part assembly effect as the stepped effect, the time (demonstration period) for displaying the component images in stages is the same, but each of the effect patterns PT1-1 to PT1-3, PT2-1. The presentation period may be different according to 1 to 3.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation prompting effect and the staged effect (component assembly effect) corresponding to the operation promoting effect are illustrated as being executed only when the variable display based on the super reach fluctuation pattern is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The presentation time may be varied according to the variable display time of the pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 are displayed in sequence in the specific display area Z51 in the component assembly presentation, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a pre-reading preview effect, it is possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal, and the display mode of the suspended display or active display can be changed. , the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5, which are the special effect images, are changed to a identifiable display mode at the timing before the part assembly effect is started, and at the timing when the part assembly effect is started, the holding is performed. It may be possible to execute an effect such that the component images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 displayed as display or active display are moved to the specific display area Z51 and displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that the part set effect will be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the contents are stored. In addition, since scores and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

In the case of a slot machine, the game area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which symbols are varied and displayed by a variable display device such as reels. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to the variable display device (for example, a reel, a liquid crystal display, etc.) with the above-described patterns.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, a stick controller 31A including a controller sensor unit 35A, a push button 31B including a push sensor 35B, a ball hitting operation handle 30 including a handle sensor (not shown), etc.);
Acceleration effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). 31A or push button 31B can execute an operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a detectable action (see FIGS. 8-19 (A) and (B));
Before the promotion effect is executed, a step effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a step effect in which the display mode of the special effect image changes in stages) starts the operation promotion effect in the super ready-to-win effect. 8-14 to 8-14, in which the part images ZA1 to ZA5 and ZC1 to ZC5 related to the controller image Z1 and the push button image Z3 used for the operation prompting effect are displayed step by step. Figure 8-16) and
with
The promotion effect execution means is
The promotion effect can be executed in a plurality of types including a first mode and a second mode in which the rate of the advantageous state is higher than when the promotion effect of the first mode is executed. Yes (for example, in the operation promotion effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a controller image Z1 imitating the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5 and a character image Z2 of "Close!" or, as shown in FIG.
When the display mode of the special effect image changes to the special display mode in the step effect, the promotion effect can be executed in the second mode (for example, the collective success based on the effect patterns PT2-2 and PT2-3). is executed, the operation of the stick controller 31A is promoted through the controller assembly effect in the operation promoting effect at a higher rate than when the parts collecting effect of failure based on the effect pattern PT2-1 is executed. (See Figure 8-10)
moreover,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. A game machine whose mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display).
According to this feature, since the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode and the expectation for the promotion effect to be executed in the second mode can be increased step by step, the interest in the game is improved. do. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change, so the interest in the game is improved.

Also, the promotion effect and the change effect may be associated with each other. For example, when the first mode is displayed as the promotion effect, the execution ratio of the change effect may be set higher than when the second mode is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to infer the execution of the change performance from the performance mode of the promotion performance, and the interest is improved.

Moreover, you may associate step production|presentation and change production|presentation. For example, the display mode of the specific display may be changed at the timing when the stage effect changes. By doing so, each performance changes at the same timing, and the interest in the game is improved.

Moreover, you may associate step production and specific production. For example, the display mode of the special effect image may be changed to the special display mode in the staged effect more easily when the specific effect is being executed. By doing so, when the step performance is executed while the specific performance is being executed, the display mode of the special performance image is changed to the special display mode and the promotion performance is executed in the second mode. The expectation for the event can be further heightened, and the amusement of the game is further improved.
Further, by doing so, when the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the special effect image is changed to the special display mode, the promotion effect is executed in the second mode, and the specific effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display changes when it is displayed, and the expectation for the further change of the display mode after the end of the specific performance can be heightened, and the amusement of the game is further improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display as the enjoyment of the game improves, a game capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display is provided. A machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1),
A change effect executing means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, and step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. A game machine whose mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another form.
(Other embodiment examples)

(Description of Characteristic Portion 112IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control can be performed in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of other characteristic portions may be configured to be changeable in the same way as the characteristic portion 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into the lock to unlock it. 112IW003a cannot be released.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 112IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), etc., to be described later in the setting change state. A setting switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052, is accommodated in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 having the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 112IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. In other words, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic portion 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side. This security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switches 112IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit or the like installed between the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. - In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type determination table (not shown), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the losing variation pattern determination table (not shown), the normal figure A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

(Display result determination table)
FIGS. 9-4A to 9-4C are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a total of three set values 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, a mode is exemplified in which the greater the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player is (the higher the probability of a big hit), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this characteristic part 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning hole (big winning hole, second big winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, general winning hole) It is possible to calculate various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases based on the totalization.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 has a four-digit display. The display portion of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments each drawing a figure of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments.

Display contents are displayed on the first and second digit display portions, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third and fourth digit display portions. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." "y7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third and fourth digit display portions.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." , "A7." is displayed on the first and second digit display portions. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative role ratio is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (percentage display) in the display portion of the third digit and the display portion of the fourth digit.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." "B6." In addition, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third and fourth digit display parts, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 for the set value set at that time. Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display can be sequentially changed.

In addition, in this characterizing section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 112IW will be described. 9-5 to 9-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characterizing section 112IW. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 112IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the restoration processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value is the factory default value (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible setting value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If the settings are not factory default (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting values have already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by performing the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, at step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). At step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

At step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON (the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is ON, RAM clear processing for clearing the contents stored in the RAM 102 is executed after the processing related to setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (the door is closed) (N at step 112IWS011) or if the setting key 112IW051 is off (N at step 112IWS012), is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 120AKSA01, but proceeds to loop processing. In addition, before entering the loop processing, the control (processing of step 112IWS010) of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 may be executed.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S013, in this characteristic part 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 112IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. On this condition, the setting values after step 120AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, depending on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, ON/OFF of the clear switch), processing for confirming the setting (setting confirmation processing) or processing for changing the setting (setting change) is performed. process). It should be noted that error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating to start the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). Moreover, when the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is the factory-shipped value (for example, "0") (step 120AKSA06). If it is the setting value at the time of shipment from the factory (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the setting value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). At step 120AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of RAM 102 is updated to "1".

At step 120AKSA07, if the setting value is the value at the time of shipment from the factory, the setting value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other setting values may be used as the initial value. The set value is also set to the initial value "1" when there is a RAM abnormality error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed). You may make it In this case, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed (step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM abnormality flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM abnormality flag is on or not.

If the set values are not factory-set values (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08 ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The setting value is updated each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the setting value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the setting value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the setting value is "3", it is updated to "1". You should update. A specific set value may be specified by operating the setting switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process for changing the setting is not executed. In this case, or if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON (step 120AKSA11; No), after executing the processing of step 120AKSA12, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is OFF. (Step 120AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains on (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue setting confirmation processing or setting change processing. When the setting value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the setting value after updating is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 by executing the process of step 120AKSA08 again.

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA14; Yes), reset the setting changing flag (step 120AKSA15), and send a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16 ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and a set value command indicating the set value is sent to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Note that the setting value command may be transmitted only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19; Yes), RAM clear processing is executed (step 120AKSA20). In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clearing process, among the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped by the same processing as in step S6. conduct. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034-S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10-S12 shown in FIG.

The set values may be displayed on the image display device 5 at step 120AKSA08. Then, subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5 .

Also, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are lit or blinked). good too. By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes during the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM), unless the setting change is completed. , may be regarded as an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and at the end of the setting change process, the setting change flag is stored. If the setting change flag is ON when the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, game control main process) is executed, an error is assumed. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally, the game arcade clerk may misunderstand that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error will occur, so that the setting change can be reliably completed.

Also, at step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read out from the backup RAM, and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be extinguished, or if all segments are lit during setting confirmation processing and setting change processing, all segments may be blinked).

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on) when the power is turned on, the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and recovery processing (step 112IWS024) if the clear switch is off. is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, while making some processing common, branching according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) , the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process are executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as individual processes.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(A) and 9-9(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends when the supply stops. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 112IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9(E), the CPU 103 stores the setting values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned off by the operation of the game arcade clerk or the like. store (update storage) in the backup area of At this time, the CPU 103 displays on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
If pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-9(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state where a game can be played, that is, a state where a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9(F), the CPU 103 displays "E.E.E.E." It is possible to

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 112IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 112IW) may be displayed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 53AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 53AK will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 53AK is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control can be performed in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set setting values. In the characteristic portion 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying/suggesting that the display result will be a big win (control to a big win game state) during execution of the variable display.

Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 when the variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a big hit. Notice effects (especially highly reliable notice effects that will result in a big hit) are easier to execute when the display result is a big hit. The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability means the reliability of the big win, and means the ratio of the big win when the announcement effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the occurrence rate or reliability of the announcement effect may differ from what is intended due to fluctuations due to the set values, or the reliability may change, which may confuse the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the setting value, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is set to the same or substantially the same range. adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent setting values from being unreasonably suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 53AK includes not only the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect that are the same, but also those that are adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained as long as they are within substantially the same range. The term “substantially the same range” may be within a predetermined range, such as within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the advance notice effect as perceived by the player. may be within substantially the same range such that they are felt to be the same.

FIG. 10-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the announcement X as the announcement effect of the characteristic portion 53AK. FIG. 10-1(A) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" for the set value "1", "1/250" for the set value "2", and "1/250" for the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the notice X to the big hit (percentage of the total variation) A (= jackpot probability a x execution ratio b) is ``1/600'' when the setting value is ``1'', and the setting value is ``2''. is "1/500" in the case of , and "1/400" in the case of the set value "3".

In addition, the probability of losing c (= 1-jackpot probability a) is "299/300" when the setting value is "1", "249/250" when the setting value is "2", and "199" when the setting value is "3". /200”. The execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of losing is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) B (=probability of failure c×execution ratio d) at which the advance notice X is executed and becomes a failure is approximately “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (=A+B) of the notice X in all fluctuations is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". /400”. In addition, the reliability D (=A/C) of the notice X is "1/7" (approximately 14%) for the set value "1" and "1/6" (approximately 17%) for the set value "2". ), and when the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution ratio of the announcement effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the setting value and without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 10-1(B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1(B), unlike the example shown in FIG. When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". In addition, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "3/299" for the setting value "1", "2.5/249" for the setting value "2", and "2" for the setting value "3". /199”.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and to suitably execute the announcement effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the announcement effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect are adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects that are featured (that is, some notice effects), and for other notice effects, without adjusting the execution ratio, depending on the set value The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, the other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of deciding whether or not to execute the notice effects. increase can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-1(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is different, but even if it is the same as shown in FIG. 10-1(A), the notice X is The rate B of execution and failure is approximately the same "1/100" regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also approximately the same (approximately 1.17% to 1.25%). , the execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of failure may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big win, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be made within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

FIG. 10-1(C) shows an example in which the rate of appearance of notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2/249” for the set value “2”, and “1.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution frequency of the notice effect, and from suggesting the set value unnecessarily. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated, and the set value can be estimated. Incidentally, by matching the appearance rate, the reliability corresponding to the set value may change relatively greatly (about plus or minus 10%), such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 10-1(D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2.5/249” for the set value “2”, and “2.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so an improvement in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 can be expected.

Note that in FIG. 10-1 (D), by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of failure according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X was adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value. However, by making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of losing the same regardless of the set value, and by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the big hit according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so that In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

The big hit probability a shown in FIGS. 10-1(A) to 10-1(D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are just examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values, it is necessary to make the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values. Moreover, at least one of the notice execution ratios b and d should be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is set to be the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a×b+(1−a)×d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the setting value. At least one of b and d should be adjusted. In addition, when the reliability D of the announcement effect is set to be the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the announcement effect is equal (a×b)/(a×b+(1−a)×d) regardless of the setting value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that the same (substantially the same) are obtained.

In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 10-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but if there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) according to the jackpot type can be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 10-1, and there are normal jackpots and probability variable jackpots as jackpot types, and the case where either jackpot type is given at an even ratio (50%) at the time of the jackpot explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the variable probability jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 10-1. In this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot is "60/100" when the setting value is "1", "50/100" when the setting value is "2", and "3" when the setting value is "3". In this case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) A1 (=probability of normal jackpot a1×execution ratio b1) of execution of advance notice X to the normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2(A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variable jackpot is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot when the notice X is executed (percentage of all fluctuations) A2 (= probability variable jackpot probability a2 × execution ratio b2) is set to “1/1200” for the set value “1” 2", it is "1/1000", and the setting value is "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (percentage of total variation) A (=A1+A2) that becomes a big hit when the notice X is executed is "44/24000" when the setting value is "1" and "48/24000" when the setting value is "2". ”, and “54/24000” when the set value is “3”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-2(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "196/(299×80)" for the setting value "1" and " 192/(249×96)”, and “186/(199×120)” for the set value “3”. Therefore, the ratio of failure due to the execution of advance notice X (percentage of all fluctuations) is "196/24000" for the setting value "1", "192/24000" for the setting value "2", and "192/24000" for the setting value "2". 3" is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 10-2(B), the appearance rate C (=A+B) of the advance notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. can be By doing so, while the execution ratio of the notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, when the notice effect is executed, the ratio of which jackpot type will be different depending on the setting value. Execution of the advance notice effect leads to expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 10-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the time execution rate. That is, at least one of the announcement execution ratios b1 and b2 and d should be adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a1×b1+a2×b2+c×d of the announcement X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X according to the jackpot type. In this case, regardless of the setting value, the reliability D of the advance notice effect D=(a1×b1+a2×b2)/(a1×b1+a2×b2+((1−a1−a2)×d) is the same (substantially the same). At least one of the execution ratios b1 and b2 of the notice and d may be adjusted as follows.By doing so, the notice effect is executed while the reliability of the notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which type of jackpot is to be won differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) will be achieved by executing the advance notice performance according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects among the advance notice effects, the execution ratio of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. For example, there are normal big wins and variable probability big wins (distribution of 50% of the big win types) as the big win types, and a notice Y for notifying that the big wins will be the variable probability big wins may be executed as the advance notice effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the case of a normal jackpot or loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Y at the time of the variable probability big hit is "60/100" for the set value "1", "50/100" for the set value "2", and "40/100" for the set value "3". 100”. The jackpot probability is similar to the example shown in FIG. 10-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the advance notice Y of all fluctuations is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the advance notice Y for notifying that the probability variable big win will be achieved can be executed at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to foresee that the variable probability big hit will occur regardless of the set value. In addition, since the advance notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the variable probability big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility of a variable probability big hit may be executed when the game is lost. For example, when executing the advance notice Z that gives notice of a variable probability big hit as the notice effect, as shown in FIG. /100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variable jackpot is the same as the execution ratio of the notice Y shown in FIG. /1000”. Then, the execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of failure is "3/2990" for the set value "1", "2.5/2490" for the set value "2", and "2" for the set value "3". /1990”. The rate B at which the advance notice Y is executed and results in a loss is "1/1000" in any set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the advance notice Z in all fluctuations is "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended rate, and in the case of a big win, a notice of a probability variable big win. Z can be performed favorably. In addition, since the advance notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Either the appearance rate or the reliability of the advance notice Z may differ depending on the set value.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrows in FIG. 10-5(A) indicate that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. indicates that there is When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state without being conscious of the set value. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-5(C), the decorative design showing the number 7 stops in the decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5(D), the characters "Super Reach!" are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. be started. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, for example, just before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, the player comes to expect a variable probability big win. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, so the interest is improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z are made executable, the effect is to give notice/suggestion that both of them will result in a variable probability big hit. It is preferable to make some presentation modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big hit, a message indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. Note that the effect mode of the notice effect shown in FIG. 10-5 is an example, and any effect may be used as long as it can suggest/predict whether a big win or a variable probability big win will occur.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 53AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the set values are provided in three stages from 1 to 3, but the set values may be set in two stages or less or in four stages or more (for example, six stages). Also, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. However, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. Also, the big hit probability corresponding to the setting value shown in FIG.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for all set values (set values 1 to 3) is the same or substantially within the same range. I was trying to change (adjust) accordingly, but among the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values is the same or almost within the same range. may For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value (for example, setting value 2) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. good. Also, when the set values are in six stages, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. , at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the second set value group (eg, set values 4 to 6) may be set to be the same or substantially within the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least some of the advance notice effects are set to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values, but the specific effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when determining the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs on the side of the effect control board 12, by varying the determination ratio of the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs according to the set value, First, the appearance rate and reliability of each ready-to-win effect and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-run number may be controlled to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table in which a different execution ratio is assigned for each set value may be used to decide whether to execute the notice effect. A table serving as a reference may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by calculating a parameter corresponding to the set value in the table, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4 are examples, and can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than the advance notice effects shown in the above embodiments may be executable. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set values, and in some or all of the other notice effects, the set values The rate of occurrence and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the set values assuming the same execution ratio regardless of the number. For example, among the notice effects, the notice effects with relatively high reliability are set so that the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the setting value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. A high advance notice effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values for all the notice effects, the control burden related to the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effects is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific notice effect out of multiple types of notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is other setting values, it is not executed (or is executed). difficult). For example, a specific announcement effect with a high degree of reliability (such as a jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (such as In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of failure. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance by failing despite the execution of the specific advance notice performance, and to suggest/notify that the set value is high.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect. ) may be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set value. It can be different according to your needs.

In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice was determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but depending on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not there is reach and type, whether or not there is pseudo-run and number of times) at the time of loss, You may vary the execution ratio of an advance notice production.

In the above embodiment, the probability of a big hit in the variable probability state is not taken into consideration, but even in the variable probability state, the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Also, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. For example, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where the probability of hitting a big hit is high and the announcement effect is easy to execute (high probability state), the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value, In the normal state (low-probability state), such adjustment may not be performed. In addition, between different game states, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may differ, or may be adjusted to be the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-precision high base state and the low-precision high-base state to make it indistinguishable, a notice effect (a specific notice effect ) may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set values, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state from being recognized as visually indistinguishable due to the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are normal jackpots and variable probability jackpots as jackpot types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted to the same or substantially the same range according to the jackpot types regardless of the set values. was becoming The difference between the jackpot types may be the size of the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time-saving state or probability variable state controlled to the jackpot game state.

When a small win is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when a small win is obtained, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big win and at the time of loss can be changed according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the small win according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. . For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in a winning opening opened in a small winning game state and controlled to a big winning game state based on passing through the specific area in the small winning game state, advance notice of a small winning is made. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect will be a notice of a big win, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for predicting a small win may be adjusted to be the same or substantially within the same range regardless of the set values. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect You can adjust the degree. Specifically, considering the big hit probability, small win probability, and loss probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, small win, and loss according to the set value, The appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

If it is possible to execute a notice effect in each of the multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-run, the appearance rate and reliability will be adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the setting value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-run. You may By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability for all variations of pseudo-runs.

In the above embodiment, only the big hit probability is changed by the setting value, but the effect control board 12 side may change the effect mode and the execution ratio of the effect according to the setting value. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, a different ready-to-win effect or an effect during variable display such as a pseudo-run may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest a set value according to the execution ratio of the effect.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 53AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 53AK),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 10-1(B), (C), FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1 (B), (C), FIGS. -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 10-1(B), FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The ratio of control to the advantageous state (for example, reliability) when the specific effect is executed is the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIG. 10-1 (B), FIG. 10 -3, Fig. 10-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed according to the set value (eg, FIG. 10-1(C), FIG. 10-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that the game property of guessing the reliability can be provided, and the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it can be expected that a specific advantageous state will be achieved according to the set value, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 54AK)
Further, the characteristic portion 53AK includes the invention related to the characteristic portion 54AK.
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 54AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 54AK),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is configured to control a ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 10-1 ( B), (D), Fig. 10-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (the rate at which the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state) regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect execution means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1(B), (D), and 10-4). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the reliability of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 10-1(B), FIG. 10-4). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the reliability of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be set within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-1(B), 10-3, and 10-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set values, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed according to the set value (for example, FIG. 10-1(D)).
According to such a configuration, although the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, the rate of appearance changes, so the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 10-2 to 10-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 57AK)
Next, the feature 57AK will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 57AK can display, as specific displays corresponding to the variable display, a suspended display corresponding to the suspended variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect (holding change forewarning) for changing the display mode of the pending display and the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to a zone in the effect, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is in an advantageous state for the player. During the zone effect, a display or the like is performed on the image display device 5 to indicate that the zone is shifted to the effect zone. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, and can notify the player that the state is advantageous over a plurality of times of variable display. Such a zone effect is also executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect indicating that it will be advantageous (such as high reliability of the big hit) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of a specific display is likely to change is provided as a performance zone. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not being in the display change high probability zone. Thus, in the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change, that is, a big win.

Further, in the characteristic part 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) ends, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone. The display mode of the specified display is more likely to change due to execution of the pending change notice than the specific display whose display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change even after the display change high probability zone ends. The feeling can be maintained, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the characteristic portion 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of winning a big hit is high is provided as a zone for effect. The zone production of the chance zone is also called special production. Thus, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to one of the zones as a zone effect. Details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 11-1(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 with downward arrows. indicates that there is The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying active display and a pending display area 57AK002 for displaying pending display. In the pending display area 57AK002, it is possible to display up to four pending displays corresponding to the upper limit number of pending, and the right side corresponds to old pending information and the left side corresponds to new pending information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is performed, the active display is cleared and all specific displays (suspended display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 11-1(A), two pending indications are displayed. Here, active indications and pending indications are all displayed as white circles in the normal fashion. Also, the zone effect is not being executed, and the state is the normal effect.

Here, when a game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. In addition, since it is determined to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is the display change high probability zone is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the display change high probability zone is controlled. be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a star image is displayed for the second reserved display. An effect (change-suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collides) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, such a change suggesting effect suggests that the display mode of the pending display (specific display) of the action target will change (a pending change notice will be executed). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1(D), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 11-1(E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a change suggesting effect is produced for the first reserved display. executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1(F), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to green, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-1(G), at the timing when the combination of the losing decorative symbols stops and the first pending display shifts to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. be. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1(H), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggestion effect changes to purple, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1(I), at the timing when reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-1(J), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to red, for example. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the target variable display (variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-1(K), the display mode of the active display changes to gold, for example, without execution of the change-suggestion effect at the timing of developing to super reach.

In this way, when the display change high probability zone is entered, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by moving to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect a change in the display mode of the specific display and a big win. Further, even after the end of the high probability zone of display change, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 11-1 (K)) is provided, and the specific display whose display state changed before the end of the high probability zone of display change , the display mode is more likely to change even after the display change high probability zone ends than the specific display in which the display mode does not change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Even if it is not in the display change high probability zone, the pending display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is in the display change high probability zone changes more easily than the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone. That is, the number of times the specific display changes tends to increase in the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, the user can experience many successful experiences such as changing the display mode of the specific display, and thus the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. In addition, the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is in the display change high probability zone is still further than the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is at the shift of the specific display and at a predetermined timing during active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the display mode of the specific display will change. In particular, it is always executed at all timings when the specific display can change in the display change high probability zone. In addition, in FIG. 11-1, the display mode of the specific display is always changed (change is successful) after execution of the change suggestive effect, but there are cases where it is not changed (change is unsuccessful). . In other words, the change-suggestion effect may be false. By doing so, it is possible to effectively encourage the change of the display mode of the specific display to the display change high probability zone, thereby improving the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the change suggestion effect is not executed. It should be noted that the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display change high probability zone is not set. In this case, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone may be lower than in the case of the display change high probability zone. For example, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the execution ratio of the fake change suggestion effect is lower than when it is the display change high probability zone (for example, the fake change suggestion effect is not executed), so that the relative time ratio can be lowered.

It should be noted that the ratio (success ratio) at which the display mode of the specific display changes after execution of the change suggesting presentation may be different between when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone and when it is in the other zone. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower when the display change high probability zone is not selected than when the display change high probability zone is not selected. Further, a plurality of performance modes of the change suggesting performance may be provided, and the success rate and the rate of the subsequent changing performance mode (the number of stages) may differ depending on the performance mode of the change suggesting performance. By doing so, the change-suggestion effects are diversified, and the change-suggestion effects can effectively arouse the player's expectations.

Further, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the mode of execution of the change suggesting effect may be different. When it is not in the display change high probability zone, a change suggesting effect different from that in the case of the display change high probability zone may be executed. By doing so, the production can be diversified, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that regardless of which zone it is, the execution ratio of the change suggestion effect or the determination ratio of the effect mode in the case of execution may be varied depending on whether the specific display actually changes. By doing so, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect increases in the display change high probability zone, and the change suggesting effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes at a high rate is more likely to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be varied depending on the presence or absence of the change-suggestion effect and the mode of effect.

FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing the operation of specific display processing for displaying a specific display of the characteristic portion 57AK and executing pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, for example. Note that the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the pre-reading notice setting process as long as the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a starting winning has occurred due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not the start winning has occurred by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the starting winning has been received from the main board 11 or not.

If it is determined that a starting prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the starting prize and the change process of the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) A display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, based on the effect control command specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment received at the time of starting winning, the display result and the fluctuation category (such as rough fluctuation pattern classification) are read ahead, and the final display mode and display A change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, by determining the final display mode and the display change pattern, the presence or absence of execution of pending change notice and its presentation mode are determined. In this embodiment, the pending change notice may be executed in which the display mode changes multiple times during the period from when the specific display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. is determined, a display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-3. In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. And, as shown in the determination ratio in Figure 11-3, the display result (variation category) is at a different rate depending on whether it is "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", or "big hit" The final display mode is determined. In the determination ratio shown in Fig. 11-3, the final display mode is likely to be a big hit in the order of ("white" <) "blue" < "green" < "purple" < "red" < "gold" < "rainbow". (jackpot reliability), the possibility of becoming a super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility of establishing a reach are high.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are respectively changed to " Also written as a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, and “g”. In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided according to different colors, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided according to differences in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" to "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big win, and the reliability of the big win is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", the possibility of establishing reach increases. When the display mode becomes "green", at least reach is established. Also, when the display mode becomes "purple", it is determined that the super reach is achieved. However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the reliability of the big win is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the reliability of the big hit is significantly higher (12 times or more) than when it is "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the display mode becomes "red" or more. When the display mode is "gold", the reliability of the big win is further increased (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is determined that a big win will occur. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only 7% at the time of the big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in normal state), the appearance rate is low, and the production with scarcity value (premium production) It has become.

Thus, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight levels of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to change easily (the number of times of change is increased), and the number of times of change can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-4(A) and 11-4(B), seven timings "hold 4" and "hold 3" are used as change timings (timings that can be changed) of the display mode of the specific display. , "H2", "H1", "A1", "A2", and "A3" are provided. "Hold 4" is when displayed as the fourth pending display. "H3" is when displayed as the third pending display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "Hold 2" is when displayed as the second pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "Hold 1" is when displayed as the first pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "A1" is when displayed as an active display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "A 2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern (when the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all patterns are temporarily stopped during pseudo continuous It is the timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). "A3" is the time when it is displayed as an active display, and when it develops into super reach (at the start of the reach performance of super reach, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes, and to improve the appeal of the pending change notice.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "H4" to "A1" and ends at the timing of "A2". do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. "A3" is when it develops into super reach, so by ending the display change high probability zone before it develops into super reach, you can prevent the production from being complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. can be made Two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to scenarios of changes in the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the eventual change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to be selected and determined from among the types.

FIG. 11-5 is a diagram showing part of the display change pattern of the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 11-5(A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 11-5(A), in this embodiment, four types of display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, pt2-4 are provided. FIG. 11-5 shows the display mode of the specific display at each change timing. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed with a (white) from "H4" to "A1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) at "A2". In addition, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "H4" to "A3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending displays or active displays when winning a prize). there is Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to have passed the change timing at which the display mode changes (when the number of pending memories is less than the change timing at which the display mode changes), the specific display is performed in the post-change display mode. Is displayed. FIG. 11-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. , 0 or 1 time. For example, if the number of pending memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of times of change is 0.

FIG. 11-5(B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 11-5(B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). . As shown in FIG. 11-5(B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of times of change is 0 to 2 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 11-5(C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 11-5(C), in this embodiment, 13 kinds of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). . As shown in FIG. 11-5(C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of times of change is 0 to 4 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 11-5(D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 11-5(D), in this embodiment, ten kinds of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). . As shown in FIG. 11-5(D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of times of change is 1 to 6 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 11-5 shows the display change patterns when the final display mode is b, c, e, and g, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns shown in FIG. 11-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The display change pattern may be determined at any rate, but may be at an equal rate, or may be determined at a different rate depending on the display result. In the case of determining different ratios depending on the display results, it is possible to predict and suggest the possibility of a big win depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 11-5 is just an example, and display change patterns other than those shown in FIG. 11-5 may be provided. There may be fewer types.

After determining the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display in the processing of step 57 AKS002, whether or not to execute the zone effect and the type of zone in the case of execution are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling to the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling to a chance zone indicating a high possibility of winning a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal performance state in which zone performance is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and control is performed to any one of the zones when zone performance is executed.

In step 57 AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time has changed. FIG. 11-6(A) shows the determination ratio of whether to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 11-6(A), when the number of times of change is 5 or 6, the zone is always shifted to the display change high probability zone, and when the number of times of change is 0 or 1, display change It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of times of change is 2 to 4, the greater the number of times of change, the higher the percentage of transition to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling to the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display of the target of the pending change notice (after the change timing "a2"), but regardless of the timing at which the display mode changes, the number of times of change is The higher the number, the higher the percentage of transitions to the display change high probability zone. is finished, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is finished, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone may be determined depending on whether or not the active display changes at the change timing "a3" outside the display change high probability zone. For example, the higher the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone, and if the active display changes in "A3", the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. good too. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high. You will be able to maintain your feelings better.

In step 57AKS003, when it is determined to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without determining whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and whether or not to control the display change high probability zone is determined. It is not controlled. Note that the order of priority of the zone effects may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, if it is determined not to control to the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone.

When it is determined not to control to the display change high probability zone, it is determined whether to control to the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time. FIG. 11-6(B) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), there is a high probability ( 80%), and if the final display mode is other than those, it is not moved to the chance zone. By doing so, the specific display can be easily changed to a mode with high reliability of the big hit by being controlled by the chance zone, so that the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, although the display change high probability zone also has a higher hit reliability than the normal production state, the chance zone has a higher hit reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the hit reliability The display mode changes to a high degree) state. In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and the success experience is easy to enjoy, and a chance zone where the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, the variations of the zone production are diversified. As a result, the performance effect is improved and the amusement of the game is improved. It should be noted that the chance zone may be set to a state in which the reliability of the big win is higher than in the case of the normal presentation state, but the reliability of the big win is lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are stored (step 57AKS004), and control to display a specific display in a display mode according to the determination result and control to shift to a zone according to the determination result are executed ( step 57 AKS005). If the control to shift to the zone is executed here, the value corresponding to the zone flag that can identify the current zone should be set. In addition, control may be executed to notify that the zone has been changed by displaying an image corresponding to the zone to be changed on the image display device 5 or the like.

If it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the pending display (step 57AKS006). Since the pending display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11, the shift timing of the pending display is shifted. It should be determined whether or not there is

If it is determined that it is time to shift the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), control to erase the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and control to display a specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display). Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, the display change pattern is referred to, and in the case of a specific display whose display mode changes at the shift destination, control is also executed to change the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. . Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 11-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005 or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing for the pending display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come from the current fluctuation pattern and the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, etc., and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it is determined whether the display mode of the active display is to be changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, for example, the display change pattern is referenced, and control is executed to change the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. In addition, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing a change suggestion effect is also executed.

If it is determined that it is not the time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after executing the processing of step 57AKS010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the zone effect is being executed from the zone flag, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone If it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the target's fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process is ended.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control to end the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display processing ends. At step 57AKS012, control may be executed to erase the image corresponding to the zone from the image display device 5. FIG.

By executing the specific display processing as described above, the production control CPU 120 realizes the production operation of the pending change notice and the zone production as shown in FIG. 11-1.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 57AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled to either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be changed to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), when it is controlled to the display change high probability zone, as shown in FIGS. A zone display 57AK005 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed from the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is a chance zone, and the transition to the chance zone may be performed. The timing of shifting from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone (variable display for pending change notice) or , when the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (e.g., e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed and the zone is shifted from the display change high probability zone where the success experience is easy to enjoy to the chance zone where the reliability of the big win is extremely high, thus increasing the variations of the performance and enhancing the interest of the game. improves. It should be noted that the chance zone may be shifted to the display change high probability zone. In addition, the zone may be changed a plurality of times during one zone presentation. For example, after transitioning to the chance zone, transitioning to the display change high probability zone at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then transitioning to the chance zone again.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7(B)′, a zone display 57AK003 indicating a display change high probability zone and a zone display 57AK005 indicating a chance zone are both displayed, and two zones are displayed. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to inform that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the reliability of the big hit is high, as well as the variety of effects is provided.

In the above embodiment, the change process of the display mode of the specific display (the production mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the change timing is when the hold display is shifted. However, the change timing is not limited to this, and the display state of the hold display may be changed at any timing during variable display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, when pending change notice is being executed for one specific display, execution of pending change notice for other specific displays is restricted. not Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, execution of the pending change notice may be restricted with respect to the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display to be noticed from becoming difficult to understand in the display change high probability zone. In this case, the specific display newly displayed in the high display change probability zone after the end of the high display change probability zone does not change its display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition) may further change. Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change its display mode than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) ends, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is higher than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the specific display whose display mode changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display may not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone tends to change its display mode more times than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

The display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed in the display change high probability zone. For example, by changing the specific display other than the specific display (specific display of the target) corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone to "blue", it may be difficult to understand which target is. . At that time, a pending change notice in which multiple specific displays change at the same time, and a change suggestive production that suggests that multiple specific displays will change at the same time (for example, a production in which an effect is applied to the entire reserved display area or an image acts, etc.) may be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific indications may be changed successfully, or only one may be changed. Also, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in other zones or in a normal state where zone production is not in progress. good.

In the above embodiment, there is one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zone. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. may In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be made different to indicate which display change high probability zone it is. For example, the weak indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a blue zone indication 57AK003, and the strong indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a red zone indication 57AK003. Then, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong indication change high probability zone. In order to shift from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that all of them are display change high probability zones, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, the display change high-probability zone may include a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display has a high probability of changing and a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display tends to change more frequently.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to switch between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone. Alternatively, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong indication change high probability zone may be transitioned. In addition, it is also possible to limit the transition to a specific route so that the zone does not move, or to perform an effect such that the route diverges (a effect indicating which zone to move to).

In the above-described embodiment, the change suggesting effect is a effect in which the star image 57AK004 acts on the specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggesting effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. Alternatively, it may suggest that the display mode of the specific display changes due to sound, lamp, movement of the movable body, or the like. Further, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggesting effect may be changed depending on whether the zone effect is being performed or not, and depending on which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 are used to notify that the zone effect is being executed and to which zone the control is performed. The zone may be notified by a lamp, an operation of a movable body, or the like. In addition, the background image may differ greatly depending on the zone, the type of zone may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, the reserved display area 57AK002), and the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. may vary by zone.

A sub-display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the type of zone on the sub-liquid crystal. You may Also, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be varied depending on the zone type. Any one of the above zone notification methods may be used, or any combination thereof may be used.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 57AK may be combined as appropriate. Also, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK and the invention relating to other characteristic portions may be combined as appropriate.

For example, by combining the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK with the invention relating to the characteristic portions 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or substantially the same regardless of the setting value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 57AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 57AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggesting effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) capable of executing a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 11-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is enhanced.

1 pachinko game machine 120 effect control CPU
30 Ball hitting operation handle 31A Stick controller 31B Push button Z1 Controller image Z17 Handle image Z3 Push button image ZA1-5 Part image ZB1-4 Part image ZC1-5 Part image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. easily changeable,
It is possible to execute a change-suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes depending on whether the specific effect is being executed or not,
The change suggesting effect can be executed when the specific display moves,
A notification image that allows recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
As a display mode after the change of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode with a high degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state from the first mode,
The change effect executing means can execute the change effect when the specific display moves when the specific effect is not executed,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the highly expected special effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images